Galaxy Tab 8.5

A N D R O I D T A B L E T
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your

device and keep it for future reference.
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Galaxy Tab, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Galaxy Tab
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser
General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered
under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
GT-P7310_MR-2_UM_English_UELP4_BH_080712_F1
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.
Samsung Electronics America (SEA), Inc
Address: 85 Challenger Road

Ridgefield Park,
New Jersey
07660
Toll Free 1-800-SAMSUNG

Telephone:
Internet http://www.samsung.com
Address:
©
2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights reserved.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, XT9® Smart Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance
Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Calendar, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google
Play Books, Google Play Movies, Google Play Music, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google
Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype is a trademark of Swype, Inc.
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
TM
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
May play DivX® video up to HD 1080p.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX
videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (Apps > Settings >
About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to
complete your registration.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ...........................6 Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Understanding This User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Quick Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Turning Your Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Primary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Setting Up Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Retrieving Your Google Account Password . . . . 12 App Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Using Google Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Wallpapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Galaxy Tab Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini App Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Securing Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Apps Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Section 2: Understanding Your Device .....16 Section 3: Entering Text ........................... 42
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Samsung Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Text Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Top and Bottom Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Changing the Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Using the Samsung Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Navigating Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using the Handwriting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Speech Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
1
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts ........... 54 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Section 7: Music ......................................102
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Play Music App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Viewing Your Music Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Section 5: Messaging ............................... 64 Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Music Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Section 8: Photos and Video ...................118
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Section 6: Internet and Social Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Networking ............................................. 81 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Google+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Movie Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Section 9: Connections ...........................137
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Managing Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Kies Via Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2
Synchronizing with Windows Media Player . . 144 Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device . . . . . . 144 Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Section 10: Applications and Widgets ...145 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Update Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
GPS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Movie Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Moviefone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Amazon Kindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Music Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Music Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Pen Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Photo Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Dual Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Play Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
eBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Polaris Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Google+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Readers Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Samsung Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Screensaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
3
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . 215
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Social Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . 218
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Video Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Words Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Yahoo! Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Section 11: Settings ............................... 176 Restricting Children's Access to
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Your Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Wireless and Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . 225
Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Section 13: Warranty Information ..........227
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
About Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 End User License Agreement for Software . . 232
Section 12: Health and Safety Social Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Information ........................................... 208 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . 208 Social Hub Privacy Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . 245
Certification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT . . . . . . . 246
4
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES . . . . . . . . . . .249
THIRD PARTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION
CHILDREN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . .250
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Social Hub End User License Agreement . . . .250
CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS . . . 248 Index ......................................................... 255
5
Section 1: Getting Started
This section helps you to quickly start using your device.
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual
Understanding This User Manual start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of
your device. A robust index for features begins on page 255. All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual
Also included is important safety information, beginning on displays may vary depending on the software version of
page 208, that you should know before using your device. your device and any changes to the device’s settings.
This manual gives navigation instructions according to the
default display settings. If you select other settings, Special Text
navigation steps may be different. In this manual, some text is set apart from the rest. This
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual special text is intended to point out important information,
assume that you are starting from a Home screen. To get to a share quick methods for activating features, define terms,
Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For more and more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:
information, refer to “Securing Your Device” on page 14. • Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu,
or sub-menu.
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings
• Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts.
and may vary from your device depending on the
software version on your device and any changes to the • Important: Points out important information about the current
device’s settings. feature that could affect performance.
• Warning: Brings important information to your attention that can
help to prevent loss of data or functionality or damage to your
device.
Getting Started 6
Text Conventions
Warning! Use only approved charging devices. Approved
This manual provides condensed information about how to accessories are designed to maximize battery life.
use your device. To make this possible, the following text Using other accessories may invalidate your
conventions are used to represent often-used steps: warranty and may cause damage.
➔ Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting
successive options in longer, or repetitive, procedures. For Battery Indicator
example: The Battery icon in the Status Bar shows the battery
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings power level. When battery power is 15% or less, your device
➔ Wi-Fi. prompts you to charge the battery. If you continue to operate
the device without charging, the device powers off. For
Battery battery use information, see “About Device” on page 206.
Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion Tip: Touch the Time field to display battery charge status.
battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable)
are included with the device for charging the battery. Charging the Battery
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (Outlet
charge the battery before using your device for the first Connector, Charging Head, and USB cable) to charge your
time. device from any standard AC power outlet.
After the first charge, you can use the device while
charging.
7
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully
charge the battery before using your device for the first
time.
Correct Incorrect
After the first charge, you can use the device while
charging.
1. Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (1)..
Charger/Accessory
Port
3. Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power

Correct
outlet.
Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen

does not function due to an unstable power supply,
Incorrect unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet
Charging
Head or unplug the USB cable from the device.
2. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/ 4. When charging is complete, unplug the Charging Head
Accessory Port (2). from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from
the device.
Getting Started 8
Turning Your Device On and Off Note: Your device’s internal antenna is located along the top
Turning Your Device On back of the device. Do not block the antenna; doing so
Press and hold the Power/Lock Key . may affect signal quality and may cause the device to
operate at a higher power level than is necessary. For
For more information, refer to “Unlocking the Device” on
more information, refer to “GPS Applications” on
page 14.
page 145.
Turning Your Device Off

1. Press and hold the Power/Lock Key .
2. At the prompt, touch Power off ➔ OK.
Setting Up Your Device
When you first turn on your device, you are asked to set up a
few things. To do that, the following screens display. Some
screens can be skipped (touch Skip) or re-displayed (touch
Back). Some screens display depending on the options you
choose.
Welcome
1. Touch the language field, scroll through the list, and
touch the language you want your device to use, such
as, English (United States).
2. Touch Start.
9
Wi-Fi Make it Google
Make sure the Wi-Fi OFF / ON icon is set to ON and Your new device uses your Google account to fully use its
choose one of the following options: Android features, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Google
Touch Add network to enter a Network SSID that is Talk, and Google PlayTM.
not listed. The Make it Google screen allows you to create a new
Google account or sign in, if you already have a Google
Touch Scan to make sure you have an accurate list
account.
of Wi-Fi networks.
Touch one of the Wi-Fi networks in the list, enter the Note: If you skipped Wi-Fi setup, the Wi-Fi setup screen
password, and touch Connect. Touch and connect to displays and you must connect through a Wi-Fi network.
another Wi-Fi network or touch Next to continue.
Touch Sign in and then enter the email address and
Touch Skip to perform this task later. For more password of your existing account.
information, refer to “Wi-Fi” on page 176. – or –
Set Date and Time Touch Get an account or enter the email address and
1. Touch the time zone field (GMT+00:00) and select the password of your existing account.
correct time zone. – or –
2. Under Date, set the date (month, day, year), if
Touch Not now to perform this task later. For more
necessary.
information, refer to “Setting Up Your Gmail Account”
3. Under Time, set the time (hour, minute, and AM or PM), on page 64.
if necessary.
4. Touch Next.
Getting Started 10
Enable Purchases This Tablet Belongs To ...
This screen displays if you signed in to your Google account. To personalize the tablet with your name:
Enter purchase information for your Google Play 1. Touch the First and Last fields and use the on-screen
account and touch Save. keyboard to enter you first and last name.
– or – 2. Touch Next.
Touch Skip. Google Services
This screen displays if you did not signed in to your Google
Backup and Restore
account. The use of this device is subject to the privacy
This screen also displays if you signed in to your Google policy and other terms.
account.
1. Touch Learn more to read the privacy policy and other
1. Read the backup and restore information.
terms.
2. Enable either or both options.
2. Touch Next, if you agree that your device may receive
3. Touch Next. and install updates from Google.
The Restoring screen displays while your information is Setup Complete
being restored.
Congratulations! Your device is set up and ready to use.
Use Google Location
Touch Finish.
1. Read the information on the screen and enable either
The main Home screen displays.
or both of the Google location services.
2. Touch Next to continue.
11
Retrieving Your Google Account Task Manager
Password Your device can run applications simultaneously and some
A Google account password is required for Google applications run in the background.
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it: your device and to end running applications to extend battery
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to life. You can also uninstall applications from your device and
navigate to http://google.com/accounts. see how much memory is used by applications.
2. Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your Task Manager Pop-Up
account? link and follow the on-screen instructions. The Task manager pop-up provides information about Active
Using Google Maps applications and includes a RAM manager. It also has a link to
the Task Manager application.
In order to use some applications related to Google Maps,
To access the Task manager pop-up:
you must first connect Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to
“Wi-Fi” on page 176. 1. From a Home screen, touch Mini App Tray
➔ Task manager.
You must also enable location services to use Google Maps.
Some features require Standalone or Google location – or –
services. For more information, refer to “Location Services” Add the Program monitor widget to a Home screen and
on page 191. then touch the Program monitor widget. For more
information, refer to “Widgets” on page 29.
The Task manager pop-up displays.
Getting Started 12
2. Touch the Active applications tab to view applications – or –
running on your device. Touch to end an Access Task Manager from the Task manager pop-up.
application or End all to stop all running applications. For more information, refer to “Task Manager Pop-Up”
3. Touch the RAM manager tab to display the amount of on page 12.
Random Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch
– or –
Clear memory to clear inactive and background
Touch Navigation and then touch Task manager.
processes.
4. Touch in the top right corner of the Task manager 2. Touch Active applications to view applications running
pop-up to close the application. on your device. Touch End to end an application or
5. Touch in the top left corner to display the Task End all to end all running applications.
Manager application. 3. Touch Downloaded to view applications installed from
Google Play. Touch Uninstall to remove an application
Task Manager Application
from your device.
The Task Manager application provides information about
4. Touch RAM manager to display the amount of Random
applications, including Active applications, Downloaded, RAM
manager, Storage, and Help. Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch Clear
memory to clear inactive and background processes.
To access the Task Manager:
5. Touch Storage to view internal (Device memory) and
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
external (SD card) storage memory statistics.
➔ Task manager.
– or – 6. Touch Help to view useful tips for extending battery life.
From any screen, touch and hold Home and then

touch in the top left corner.
13
Galaxy Tab Accessories Locking the device manually
To find accessories for your Galaxy Tab: Press the Power/Lock Key .
1. Go to http://www.samsung.com/us/mobile/galaxy-tab- Unlocking the Device
accessories. 1. Press the Power/Lock Key .
Galaxy Tab accessories display. The Lock screen displays.
2. Use your model number to find compatible
accessories.
Securing Your Device
By default, the device locks automatically when the screen
times out or you can lock it manually. You can unlock the
device using one of the default Unlock screens or, for
increased security, use a personal screen unlock pattern.
For more information about creating and enabling a Screen
unlock pattern, see “Screen Lock” on page 192.
For other settings related to securing your device, see
“Location Services” on page 191.
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual

start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
Getting Started 14
2. Swipe across the screen as shown. Troubleshooting
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may
need to reset the device to regain functionality.
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and
hold the Power/Lock Key for 10 to 15 seconds.
The last screen you accessed displays.
Note: You can customize the Lock screen and set the type of
Screen Unlock you want to use (Face unlock, Pattern,
PIN, or Password). For more information, refer to
“Security” on page 192.
15
Section 2: Understanding Your Device
This section outlines key features of your device and • Photo Gallery that supports GIF, AGIF, JPEG, PNG, BMP, and WBMP
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the formats
device is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the • HD Video Player (720p)
device. – Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP43
Features – Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX
• 8.9-inch WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD touch screen • DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including
• AndroidTM Version 4.0.4, Ice Cream Sandwich premium content
• Full HTML Web Browser with Adobe® Flash® Technology May play DivX® video up to HD 1080p.
• Bluetooth® 3.0 Wireless technology. For more information, refer • Music player that supports WAV, MP3, AAC+, eAAC+, AMR, WMA,
to “Bluetooth” on page 178. MID, FLAC, IMY, RTTTL/RTX, OTA, and Vorbis formats
• Built-in Wi-Fi technology (802.11 a/b/g/n) • 1GB RAM memory and 16GB or 32GB on-board memory, which is
• 3 Megapixel camera and camcorder with flash plus 2 Megapixel used for data storage and access
forward-facing camera for Video Chat • Preloaded applications such as AllShare, Google PlayTM Books,
• Full integration of Google applications (Gmail, YouTubeTM, Google PlayTM Store, Movie Studio, Moviefone, Music Hub,
TM
Google Maps , and Voice Search) Polaris® Office, Readers Hub, Social Hub, and Samsung Media
• Messaging Features: Hub. For more information, refer to “Applications” on page 37.
– GmailTM
Note: This device does not support external memory cards.
– Email (corporate and personal)
– Google TalkTM (Instant Messaging and Video Chat)
Understanding Your Device 16

Warning! This device does not support some USB storage
media devices. For more information, refer to 1 2
“Galaxy Tab Accessories” on page 14.
Front View
The following items can be found on the front of your device
as illustrated.
1. Light Sensor: Used to control screen brightness
automatically and when taking photos with the
Front-facing Camera.
2. Front-facing Camera Lens: Used when taking photos.
3. Display Screen: The orientation of the display screen
rotates with the tablet as you turn it. You can turn this
feature on and off. For more information, refer to
“Auto-Rotate Screen” on page 184. 3
17
Top and Bottom Views
The following items can be found on the top and bottom of
your device.
1. Power/Lock Key: Press and hold to turn the device on or 1
off. Press to lock the device or to wake the screen for
2
unlocking.
5
2. Volume Key: From a Home screen, press to adjust 3
Master Volume. During music playback, press to adjust 4
volume. 6
3. 3.5mm Headset Jack: Plug in for headphones.

4. Microphone: Used to pick up your voice or audio during 5
recording.
5. External Speakers: Used in music or video playback,
notification tones, and for other sounds.
6. Charger/Accessory Port: Plug in a USB cable for
charging or to sync music and files.

Back View Home Screen
The following items can be found on the back of your device. The Home screen is the starting point for using your device.
1. Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording
videos. Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
2. Camera Flash: Used when taking photos.
1. Google Search: Search the web by typing or speaking.
1 2 For more information, refer to “Search” on page 99.
2. App Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common applications. For
more information, refer to “App Shortcuts” on
page 33.
3. Home screen: The starting point for using your device.
Place shortcuts, widgets and other items to customize
your device to your needs.
4. Current screen: Indicates which Home screen is being
displayed. For more information, refer to “Extended
Home Screen” on page 21.
5. Widgets: Applications that run on the Home screen.
Some widgets are found on the Home screen by
default. For more information, refer to “Widgets” on
page 29.
19
8. Home: Display the central Home screen. Touch and
Tip: The area across the top of the screen is called the
hold to display the Task Manager pop-up.
Application Bar.
9. Navigation: Open a list of thumbnail images of apps
you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open
1 2 3 4 5 6 it. Touch and hold to display the Apps screen. Touch
and then touch Task manager to display the Task
Manager.
10. Quick Launch: This softkey can be set to launch several
different applications. The default setting is Screen
capture. For more information, refer to “Quick Launch”
on page 185.
11. Primary Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common features.
These shortcuts are found on the Home screen by
default. For more information, refer to “Primary
Shortcuts” on page 29.
12. Mini App Tray: Shortcuts to apps that you can use
anytime, such as your calendar, a memo pad, and a
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
calculator. For more information, refer to “Mini App
Tray” on page 35.
6. Apps: Display the Apps screen.
7. Back: Return to the previous screen or option.

13. System Bar: The area along the bottom of the Home
Note: The center panel displays when you touch Home.
screen where you can find navigation buttons and
icons that show notifications, battery power, and
Customizing the Home Screens
connection details.
To customize the Home screens to suit your preferences:
14. Notification Icons: Presents icons to show notifications
1. Navigate to one of the Home screen panels.
from the system or from an application. Touch a
2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen
Notification Icon to display more detail. For a list of
pop-up displays.
icons, see “Status Bar” on page 27.
3. Under Add to Home screen touch:
15. Time: The current time. For more information, refer to
• Apps and widgets to add app or widget shortcuts on the
“Date and Time” on page 202.
Home screen.
16. Status Icons: Indicate the status of your tablet. Touch
• Folder to add a folder on a Home screen. For more
the Time / Status Icons area to display the Status
information, refer to “Folders” on page 33.
Details panel. For more information, refer to “Status
Bar” on page 27. • Page to add or remove a Home screen. For more information,
refer to “Adding and Removing Home Screen Panels”
Extended Home Screen
on page 22.
The Home screen consists of the Home panel, plus four
– or –
panels that extend beyond the display width to provide more
space for adding shortcuts and widgets. Set a new wallpaper. For more information, refer to
Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to scroll to “Wallpapers” on page 34.
the left or right side panels. As you scroll, the indicator at the
top of the display shows your current position.
21
Display Settings
You can customize display screen settings to your
preferences. For more information, refer to “Display” on
page 183.
Adding and Removing Home Screen Panels
Your device comes with seven Home screen panels. You can
customize the Home screen by removing or adding panels.
Note: The panel in the center position displays when you touch
Home.
1. From a Home screen, pinch the screen from the left 2. Use these controls to configure panels:
and right side to the center to display the editing
Remove: Touch and drag a panel to the Trash
screen. Can to remove the panel from the Home
– or – screen.
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen Add: Touch to add a new panel, up to a total
pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen, touch of seven. This option is available when less
Page. than seven panels have been added.
Default Home Page: Touch the Home icon at
the upper right corner of a panel to set it as
the default home screen.

3. To rearrange the order of panels, touch and drag a Screen Capture
panel to a new location. Touch Screen Capture to capture an image of the
4. Touch Back to return to the Home screen current screen and edit the image, then touch
Navigating Your Device Save to save the image. Touch and hold to capture and
Use command buttons and the touch screen to navigate. add an image of the current screen to the clipboard.
Command Buttons Note: A copy of the screenshot is automatically saved to the
Back clipboard.
Touch Back to return to the previous screen, option, or
step. To view the screen shots:
Note: When the on-screen keyboard is active, Close
➔ My Files.
Keyboard displays.
2. Touch Root ➔ Pictures ➔ Screenshots.
Home 3. Touch a screen capture file to display it.
Touch Home to display the first center Home screen.
Note: This softkey can be modified to launch other
Navigation
applications. For more information, refer to “Quick
Touch Navigation to open a list of thumbnail images of Launch” on page 185.
apps you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open it.
Touch Task manager to display the Task Manager.
23
Other Buttons Touch and Hold
Google Search Activate on-screen items. For example:
Touch Google to search the web or your device. • Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
Context-Sensitive Menus • Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Context-sensitive menus offer options for features or Swipe, Flick, or Slide
screens. To access context-sensitive menus: Swipe, flick, or slide your finger vertically or horizontally
• Touch Menu to display a list of options. across the screen. For example:
• Touch an option in the list. • Unlocking the screen.
Application Bar • Scrolling the Home screens or a menu.
The Application Bar is the area along the top of various Pinch
application screens. It usually contains the Search and Menu Use two fingers, such as your index finger
icons, as well as other icons that are used to display options and thumb, to make an inward pinch
and settings. motion on the screen, as if you are picking
Screen Navigation something up, or an outward motion by
Touch sweeping your fingers out.
Touch items to select or launch them. For example: For example:
• Touch the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or text. • Pinch a photo in Gallery to zoom in.
• Touch a menu item to select it. • Pinch a webpage to zoom in or out.
• Touch an application’s icon to launch the application.

Notifications 2. Touch a notification summary to respond to it.
When you receive a notification, the Notification icon displays 3. Touch outside the Status Details screen to close the
in the System Bar, to the left of the Time. Notifications window.
indicate the arrival of Gmail, Email, alarms, and more. Quick Settings
Touch a Notification icon for more detail. For example, touch To view and control the most common settings for your
a Gmail Notification icon to see who sent the message. tablet, as well as accessing the complete Settings
Touch the Time field to open the Notifications list to view all application, open the Quick Settings panel.
of your current notifications. Touch a Notification in the list to 1. Touch the Time in the System Bar.
display the item. For example, touch a Gmail entry to open
The Quick Settings pop-up displays.
the Gmail application and view the message.
Most apps that send notifications, such as Gmail and Google
Talk, have individual settings that can be configured. See the
settings for individual applications in the applicable section
of this user manual.
Status Details
To display the current date and time, battery status, and
Wi-Fi connectivity status, open Status Details.
1. Touch the Time in the Status Bar.
The Status Details display. If you have any current
notifications, their summaries are listed below the
Notifications title.
25
The Quick Settings are: • Bluetooth: Touch to enable or disable Bluetooth. For more
• Wi-Fi: Touch to enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information, information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 139.
refer to “Wi-Fi” on page 176. • Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled.
• GPS: Touch to enable or disable Standalone GPS services. • Sync: Synchronizes your device with the network.
For more information, refer to “Use GPS Satellites” on Synchronizes contacts, email, time, and a variety of accounts.
page 191. • Brightness: Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or
• Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Touch to enable or disable sound touch Auto to allow the device to set brightness automatically
mode. based on available light and battery charge status. For more
• Screen rotation: When On the screen rotates automatically information, refer to “Brightness” on page 184.
from landscape to portrait and vice versa. When Off the screen • Settings: Touch to open the Settings application. For more
is fixed in landscape mode. For more information, refer to information, refer to “Settings” on page 176.
“Auto-Rotate Screen” on page 184. • Notifications: Displays system notifications. For more
• Power saving: When enabled, your device automatically information, refer to “Notifications” on page 25.
analyzes the screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve 2. Touch Clear to remove Notification Icons from the
battery power. For more information, refer to “Power System Bar.
Saving” on page 186. 3. Touch a notification entry to display the details.
Sweep the pop-up to the left to see additional settings. 4. Close the Quick Settings by touching X in the upper,
• Notification: Touch to enable or disable system and application right corner of the Quick Settings pop-up or by
notifications. For more information, refer to “Notifications” touching outside the Quick Settings screen.
on page 25.

Quick Settings also displays icons under the Notifications Status Bar
heading to alert you to activity on the tablet such as new
The Status Bar is part of the System Bar and displays icons
messages, application downloads, software updates, and to show network status, battery power, and other details.
more. The following table lists those icons.
Battery Level: Shown fully charged.
Download Successful: A recent application download
or update completed successfully.
Charging Indicator: Battery is charging.
Google Talk Invitation: Someone has invited you to
chat using Google Talk.
Device Power Critical: Battery has only three percent
Navigation Active: The Navigation App is active. For power remaining. At about 15 percent power
more information, refer to “Navigation” on page 96. remaining, a popup is displayed to remind you to
New Email Message: You have new email. Touch charge immediately.
Reply to view and answer the email. USB Connection Indicator: The device is connected
New Gmail Message: You have new Gmail. Touch the to a computer using a USB cable, but it is not
icon for additional information. charging. The battery is only charged while
connected to a computer, if the device is turned off.
Software update: There is a software update When the device is off, press the Power/Lock key to
available for this device. see the battery charging indicator.
Updates Available: Updates to the applications you Battery Fully Charged: When the battery is fully
have downloaded are available. charged, this indicator is displayed.
Wi-Fi networks available: An open Wi-Fi network is
in range.
27
USB Connected: Device is connected to a computer Music player: A song is playing. Touch the Music
using a USB cable. Displays in upper left corner of icon or touch the Status Details to see the song title
screen. and music player controls. For more information,
refer to “Viewing Your Music Library” on page 110.
Download in progress: An application is being
downloaded to the device. Wi-Fi Active: Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Airplane Mode: Indicates that the Airplane Mode is
active, which allows you to use many of your Wi-Fi Direct: Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active
device’s features, but it cannot access online and your tablet is connected to another device. For
information or applications. more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on
Set up input methods: When the keyboard is being page 138.
displayed, touch this icon to display a menu of quick GPS Active: Displays when GPS is active.
keyboard settings.
Bluetooth Active: Bluetooth is turned on. For more Alarm Set: Displays when you set an alarm to ring at
information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 139. a specified time. For more information, refer to
“Alarm” on page 146.
Music App: A song is playing in the Music app.
Touch the Music icon or touch the Status Details to Event: This is a notification for one or more events.
see the song title and music player controls. For For more information, refer to “Creating an Event or
more information, refer to “Play Music App” on Task” on page 152.
page 102. Screenshot Captured: A screenshot has been
captured. For more information, refer to “Screen
Capture” on page 23.

Power Saving Mode: Indicates that your device is Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place
automatically making adjustments to conserve on the Home screens to access your favorite features.
battery power. For more information, refer to Adding Widgets to a Home screen
“Power Saving” on page 186. 1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to
place the Widget.
Primary Shortcuts 2. From that Home screen, touch Apps.
Primary Shortcuts appear at the bottom of the main Home 3. Touch the Widgets tab.
screen.
Note: Swipe across the screen horizontally to view all Widgets.
Tip: The main Home screen is usually the center Home screen.
4. Touch and hold the widget’s icon, then slide your finger
The default Primary Shortcuts are: Readers Hub, Calendar, where you want to place the icon and release it.
Camera, YouTube, Maps, Internet, Samsung Apps, and Play
Store. Note: There must be room on the screen where you want to
For more information, refer to “Applications” on page 37. place the widget, otherwise the widget will not be added
Application shortcuts can be added to any Home screen. For to the Home screen.
more information, refer to “App Shortcuts” on page 33.
5. Touch Back to return to the Home screen.
Widgets
Removing Widgets
When you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets
on the center Home screen. They can also appear on the Touch and hold the Widget until the Delete icon
Home screens to the left and right of the center Home displays, then drag the Widget toward the top of the
screen. screen and drop it over the Delete icon.
29
Widget Options • Calendar (mini today): Use Calendar to organize events and tasks
The following widgets are available: for a day. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on
• AccuWeather.com: Display the forecast from AccuWeather. page 150.
Touch the widget to choose locations. • Calendar (month): Use Calendar to organize events and tasks for
• Amazon MP3: Access the Amazon MP3 app or the music player a month. For more information, refer to “Calendar” on
controls. For more information, refer to “Amazon MP3” on page 150.
page 149. • Calendar (task): Use Calendar to view and edit tasks. For more
• Analog Clock: Display an analog clock. Touch the widget to view information, refer to “Calendar” on page 150.
alarms or add a new alarm. For more information, refer to • Contact: Display a link to one of your contacts to quickly
“Alarm” on page 146. compose an Email or Gmail message. For more information, refer
• AP Mobile: Displays Top Stories and Showbiz, Sports, World, and to “Messaging” on page 64.
U.S. news from AP Mobile. • Contact: Display a shortcut to one of your contact entries. For
• Book: Touch this widget and then touch a book for quick access more information, refer to “Contacts” on page 54.
to the book. For more information, refer to “Play Books” on • Digital clock: Display the digital time, the day, and the date.
page 97. • Directions & Navigation: Get directions and navigation from
• Bookmark: Choose one of your bookmarks then touch the widget Google Maps. For more information, refer to “Maps” on
to open the website. page 92.
• Calendar: Display a calendar. For more information, refer to • Dual clock (analog): Display the date and time for two
“Calendar” on page 150. different locations. For more information, refer to “Dual
Clock” on page 155.

• Email: Display your email inbox. For more information, refer to • Google+ posts: Display a shortcut to Google+ posts. For more
“Email” on page 68. information, refer to “Google+” on page 81.
• Email account: Access an Email account. Appears once an Email • Kies via Wi-Fi: Allows computers running the KIES software to
account is set up. If you have more than one Email account set access your tablet. Both the tablet and the computer have to be
up, touch the one to which you want to link. For more on the same Wi-Fi network.
information, refer to “Email” on page 68. • Latitude: Displays your current location. Touch the location to
• Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based open Maps, touch the check mark to open the Check in at
email. For more information, refer to “Gmail” on page 64. pop-up, or touch the Refresh button to update your LatitudeTM list
• Gmail label: Access a Gmail label. Displays once a Gmail account of friends. For more information, refer to “Latitude” on page 90.
is set up. Touch the label to which you want to link. For more
• Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest
information, refer to “Setting Up Your Gmail Account” on
movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite
page 64.
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more
• Google Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 133.
Google Play Books service. For more information, refer to
• Memo: Create and save a memo on a Home screen. For more
“Play Books” on page 97.
information, refer to “Memo” on page 159.
• Google Play Music: Use this widget to control the playback of
• Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play music files
songs playing in the Music app. For more information, refer to
that you have stored on your device and memory card. You can
“Options While Playing a Song” on page 106.
also create playlists. For more information, refer to “Music
• Google Search: Display a Google Search bar. For more Player” on page 114.
information, refer to “Search” on page 99.
31
• Music playlist: Choose a music playlist to access from a home • Pulse (small): Lets you add a topical Pulse widget, like Pulse
screen. For more information, refer to “Playing, Renaming, or (large), but only the article titles are displayed. Touch a title block
Deleting a Playlist” on page 108. to link to the article in Pulse. For more information, refer to
• Picture frame: Select one or more pictures and then touch the “Pulse” on page 168.
arrow on the widget for a slide show. For more information, refer • S Bookmarks: Create bookmarks for your favorite websites. For
to “Gallery” on page 157. more information, refer to “Using Bookmarks” on page 84.
• Play Store: Download applications from the Google Play™ Store. • Settings shortcut: Allows you to create a shortcut to a particular
For more information, refer to “Play Store” on page 166. Settings item. For more information, refer to “Settings” on
• Program monitor: Display the number of active page 176.
applications. Touch to launch Task Manager. For more • Social Hub: Access your social networks, like Facebook,
information, refer to “Task Manager” on page 12. Twitter, and LinkedIn all in one place. For more information,
• Pulse (large): Lets you add a topical Pulse widget. Choices are: refer to “Social Hub” on page 170.
Pulse Hints, Time Magazine, Cool Hunting, CNN Money, SB • Software update: This shortcut makes updating your device
Nation, Fortune Tech, The Wall Street Journal, and Facebook software even easier. For more information, refer to “Software
Links. Touch your choice and then touch Save. Pulse article titles Update” on page 206.
and the first lines of an article are displayed. Touch the title block • Traffic: Enter a name for the widget and a destination, and then
to display that article’s first lines. Touch the introduction area to touch Save. Touch the widget to use the Traffic component of the
link to the article in Pulse. For more information, refer to “Pulse” Maps application. For more information, refer to “Maps” on
on page 168. page 92.
• Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on your tablet. For
more information, refer to “Video Player” on page 125.

• Yahoo! Finance: Search for and add stocks. For more 5. Touch and hold the App Shortcut and then drag the
information, refer to “Yahoo! Finance” on page 173. application icon to reposition it on the Home screen.
• YouTube: Search YouTube and watch videos. For more Removing App Shortcuts
information, refer to “YouTube” on page 100.
Touch and hold the App Shortcut until the Delete
App Shortcuts icon displays, then drag the App Shortcut toward the
top of the screen and drop it over the Delete icon.
Use App Shortcuts for quick access to applications or
features, such as Email or other applications. Folders
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to Place Folders on the Home screen to organize items together
place the App Shortcut. on the Home screen.
2. Touch Apps. Adding Folders
– or – To create a folder on a Home page:
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen 1. Navigate to the desired Home screen.
options pop-up displays. 2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen
Touch Add to Home screen ➔ Apps and widgets. pop-up displays.
3. Under Add to Home screen touch Folder.
3. Touch the Apps tab.
A new folder displays on the Home screen.
4. Touch and hold the application icon, then slide your
finger where you want to place the icon and release it.
For a list of applications, see “Apps Screen” on
page 36.
33
Managing Folders Wallpapers
To name a folder: You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen,
Touch the folder, touch the Unnamed folder field, and Lock screen, or on both the Home and Lock screens. Choose
use the keyboard to enter a name for the folder. from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have
downloaded or taken with the Camera.
To add an App shortcut to a folder:
1. From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen.
1. Add the App shortcut to the Home screen that the
The Home screen options pop-up displays.
folder is on.
2. Touch and hold the App shortcut, drag it to the folder, 2. Touch Set wallpaper for.
and drop it. The Set wallpaper for pop-up displays.
To remove an App shortcut from a folder: 3. Touch Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock
1. Touch the folder to view the contents. screens.
2. Touch the App shortcut, drag it out of the folder, and The Select wallpaper from pop-up displays the
drop it on the Home screen. following options:
Removing a Folder • Gallery: Access the Gallery to select a photo. Touch a photo to
Touch and hold the folder until the Delete icon select it. Crop and resize the picture, if desired. Touch Done to
displays, then drag the folder toward the top of the save the picture as wallpaper. Touch Cancel to cancel.
screen and drop it over the Delete icon. • Live wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded interactive animated
wallpapers. Touch a wallpaper to see an example. If available,
Note: Any App shortcuts in the folder are deleted. touch Settings to view options for the selection. Touch Set
wallpaper to save your choice.Touch Back to return to
the Live wallpapers menu.
• Wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded wallpaper images. Touch 2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray to customize the
an image to view it. Touch Set wallpaper to save it as Mini App Tray. For more information, refer to
wallpaper. Touch Back to return to the Home screen. “Customizing the Mini App Tray” on page 36.
3. Touch one of the icons to
Note: Live wallpapers is not available for the Lock screen. display a mini app pop-up.
The pop-up varies depending
Mini App Tray
on the application. Various
There are shortcuts available that link to apps that you might controls display at the top of
need while working in other apps, such as Alarm, Calculator,
the pop-up and other
Calendar, Email, Music player, Pen memo, Task manager,
information is displayed in
and World clock. In some cases, these shortcuts are actually
links to the part of the app you need most and they contain a the body of the pop-up.
link to the actual app where you can use other functions. 4. Touch options (such as ) to create new app items
1. From any screen, touch Mini App Tray at the (such as alarms or events).
bottom, center of the screen. 5. Touch items in the body of the pop-up, such as an
The Mini App Tray icons display. email entry or keys on the Calculator.
6. Touch to link to the application. For more
information, refer to “Applications” on page 37.
7. Touch to close the mini app pop-up.
35
Customizing the Mini App Tray To manually change the order of the icons on the Apps
You can choose applications to display on the Mini App Tray screen:
and arrange them in any order. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps.
1. From any screen, touch Mini App Tray at the 2. Touch Menu ➔ Edit.
bottom, center of the screen. 3. Touch and hold an icon and drag it to a new position.
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray. 4. Touch Save to save the changes.
3. Touch and drag apps in and out of the tray or to You can place shortcuts to applications on the Home screen
another position in the tray. for quick access to the application. For more information,
4. Touch Done to save your changes. refer to “App Shortcuts” on page 33.
Apps Screen To view your downloaded applications:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps.
The Apps screen displays all applications installed on your
wireless device. Applications that you download and install 2. Touch Menu ➔ Downloaded applications.
from Google Play™ or from the web are also added to a 3. Touch an icon on the Downloaded applications screen
Home screen. to launch the application.
The Apps icons are arranged in a customizable grid. To – or –
arrange the Apps icons in alphabetical order: Add an App Shortcut to a Home screen by dragging the
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps. App icon onto the Home Screen. For more information,
2. Touch Menu ➔ View type. refer to “App Shortcuts” on page 33.
3. Touch Alphabetical grid.

Application Information Amazon MP3: Access the Amazon MP3 store and
To view information about an App, such as the amount of the Amazon Cloud Player. For more information,
storage it uses, force the App to stop, uninstall updates, and refer to “Amazon MP3” on page 149.
clear data:
Calculator: The calculator provides the basic
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings arithmetic functions to solve simple arithmetic
➔ Applications➔ All. problems and advanced operators to solve more
2. Touch the application to open a screen with details complex problems. For more information, refer to
about the App. “Calculator” on page 149.
3. Touch Home to return to the Home screen. Calendar: Record events and appointments to
Applications manage your schedule. A shortcut to Calendar
displays on the Home screen by default. For more
The following is an alphabetical list of the applications that
information, refer to “Calendar” on page 150.
come preloaded on your device.
Camera: Take photos or record videos. A shortcut to
Alarm: Schedule alarms to remind you of Camera displays on the Home screen by default. For
appointments or events, or as a wake-up. For more more information, refer to “Camera” on page 154.
information, refer to “Alarm” on page 146.
Contacts: Save and manage contact information for
AllShare: Synchronize your device with your TV. For your friends and colleagues. For more information,
more information, refer to “AllShare” on page 148. refer to “Contacts” on page 154.
Amazon KindleTM: Download Amazon® books to
read on your device. For more information, refer to
“Amazon Kindle” on page 149.
37
Downloads: Files, apps, and other items you Internet: Access the Internet. A shortcut to Internet
download in Internet, Gmail, Email, or in other displays on the Home screen by default. For more
ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal storage. information, refer to “Internet” on page 81.
Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete
Latitude: Use Google Latitude to locate your friends
what you have downloaded. For more information,
on a map and share or hide your location. For more
refer to “Downloads” on page 154. information, refer to “Latitude” on page 90.
eBook: This application lets you access and read
Local: Use Google Local and Google Maps to find
books on your device. For more information, refer to places of interest and to add your own favorite
“eBook” on page 155.
places. For more information, refer to “Local” on
Email: Send and receive email from your device. For page 91.
more information, refer to “Email” on page 68.
Maps: Find locations and get directions with Google
Gallery: View and manage photos stored on your maps. A shortcut to Maps displays on the Home
device. For more information, refer to “Gallery” on screen by default. For more information, refer to
page 127. “Maps” on page 92.
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s Media Hub: Browse the latest movies and TV shows,
web-based email. For more information, refer to then rent or purchase the media for viewing on your
“Gmail” on page 64. device. For more information, refer to “Media Hub”
on page 133.
Google+: Share updates and see what is going on
around you with Google+. For more information, Memo: Create text memos and use Bluetooth to
refer to “Google+” on page 81. send memos. For more information, refer to
“Memo” on page 159.

Messenger: With Google MessengerTM, you can My Files: Find, view and manage files stored on an
bring groups of friends together into a simple group optional installed memory card. For more
conversation. For more information, refer to information, refer to “My Files” on page 162.
“Messenger” on page 80.
Navigation: Use Google Maps NavigationTM to
Movie Studio: Use Movie Studio to edit the videos search for locations, with turn-by-turn directions.
you take with the camcorder or copy onto your For more information, refer to “Navigation” on
tablet into movies. You can cut and order scenes, page 96.
add a sound track, and so on. For more information, Pen memo: This app is not only useful, but lots of
refer to “Movie Studio” on page 135.
fun, if you like to draw. Pen memo lets you type
Moviefone: Browse a directory of movies, check the memos or draw pictures. For more information,
latest theater showtimes, find theater locations refer to “Pen Memo” on page 163.
nearest to you, buying tickets in advance, view original
Photo editor: To perfect any photos stored on your
movie content and news, and read movie reviews. For tablet, use Photo editor to crop, rotate, resize,
more information, refer to “Moviefone” on page 161.
adjust color and contrast, and much more. For more
Music Hub: The Music Hub lets you purchase and information, refer to “Photo Editor” on page 165.
download songs and albums. For more information,
Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based
refer to “Music Hub” on page 116.
Google Play Books service. For more information,
Music Player: Play music and other audio files that you refer to “Play Books” on page 97.
copy from your computer. For more information, refer
to “Viewing Your Music Library” on page 110.
39
Play Movies: Use the Play Movies app to view Pulse: Pulse News gives you news visually in bite-
movies you rent from Google Play™ Movies or play sized pieces. For more information, refer to “Pulse”
any of your personal videos stored on your tablet. on page 168.
For more information, refer to “Play Movies” on
Readers Hub: Read newspapers, books, and
page 165.
magazines on your tablet. A shortcut to Readers Hub
Play Music: Play music and other audio files that you displays on the Home screen by default. For more
copy from your computer with the Music app. For more information, refer to “Readers Hub” on page 168.
information, refer to “Play Music App” on Samsung Apps: Connect to Samsung Apps and
page 102.
make your smart device even smarter. Simply and
Play Store: Browse, download, and install Android easily download an abundance of applications to
applications. A shortcut to Play Store displays on your device such as games, news, reference, social
the Home screen by default. For more information, networking, navigation, and more. A shortcut to
refer to “Play Store” on page 166. Samsung Apps displays on the Home screen by
default. For more information, refer to “Samsung
Polaris Office: This application provides a central place
Apps” on page 169.
for managing your documents online or offline. For
more information, refer to “Polaris Office” on Screensaver: When your tablet screen automatically
page 167. times out, instead of a blank screen, enable the Galaxy
Tab Screensaver, which is actually an action-packed
video tour of all the fantastic features that you will find
on your Galaxy Tab. For more information, refer to
“Screensaver” on page 169.

Search: Use the Google search engine to search the Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on
internet. Google Search displays on all Home your tablet. For more information, refer to “Video
screens. For more information, refer to “Search” on Player” on page 125.
page 99.
Words Free: Play Words With Friends, the number one
Settings: Configure your device to your preferences. mobile word game, free. For more information, refer to
For more information, refer to “Settings” on “Words Free” on page 172.
page 176.
World clock: View the date and time in any time
Social Hub: Access your social networks, like zone. For more information, refer to “World Clock”
Facebook, YouTube, and Twitter, all in one place. For on page 173.
more information, refer to “Social Hub” on YouTube: View and upload YouTube videos, right
page 170.
from your device. A shortcut to YouTube displays on
Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users. For more the Home screen by default. For more information,
information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 76. refer to “YouTube” on page 100.
Task manager: View and manage active
applications. For more information, refer to “Task
Manager” on page 12.
41
Section 3: Entering Text
This section describes how to enter words, letters, Text Input Methods
punctuation and numbers when you need to enter text.
Your device offers three text input methods.
Samsung Keyboard • Google voice typing: You can use your voice to enter text
Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keyboard for text entry using the Voice input feature. Your device recognizes your
called the Samsung keyboard. Use the keyboard to enter speech and enters text for you. For more information, refer
letters, punctuation, numbers, and other characters into text to “Using Speech Recognition” on page 53.
entry fields or applications. Access the keyboard by touching
• Samsung keyboard: The Samsung keyboard is also a virtual
any text entry field.
QWERTY keyboard that allows you to enter text by touching keys
The keyboard displays at the bottom of the screen. By
on the screen. The Samsung keyboard includes predictive text,
default, when you rotate the device, the screen orientation
which matches your key touches to common words so that you
updates to display the keyboard at the bottom of the screen.
can select the word to enter it into your text.
• Swype: Swype™ is a new text input method that allows you to
enter words by gliding your finger over the virtual QWERTY
keyboard, lifting your finger between words. You can also enable
Word prediction, which matches your key touches to common
words.
Entering Text 42
Changing the Input Method Resize New Delete
When entering text, you can select the text input method. Keyboard Paragraph Key
1. Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar.
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.
2. Touch an input method to activate it.
3. Touch to display that input method’s settings.
For more information, refer to “Keyboards and Input Methods”
on page 196.
Note: Swype has to be enabled before it is available in the

Set up input methods list. Shift Settings Select Emoticons Clipboard
Language
Handwriting
Using the Samsung Keyboard Text Input Mode Space Bar Recognition
The Samsung keyboard is a custom virtual QWERTY keyboard, Configuring the Keyboard
featuring predictive text. Input characters by touching the
To configure the Samsung keyboard to your preferences:
on-screen keys with your finger or use speech recognition.
As you enter characters, predictive text matches your key
touches to common words and displays them. Select a word
from the display to insert it into your text. For more 2. Touch next to Samsung keyboard.
information, refer to “Using XT9 Predictive Text” on page 45. The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays. For
Your tablet also provides handwriting recognition to make the more information, refer to “Configuring the Samsung
task of text entry that much easier. Keyboard” on page 197.
43
Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters Touch to toggle between a large and small keyboard.
The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower Touch and hold the Period key ( . ) to open a small window
case alphabet letters by touching Shift to toggle the with a set of common symbols.
case, before touching the letter key(s). Other Keyboard Functions
• Touch once to switch from abc to Abc mode. Touch to select the language, if more than one language
• Touch twice to switch to ABC mode. When ABC mode is enabled, has been set. The current language displays on the space
the Shift key background turns blue. bar.
Entering Symbols and Numbers Touch and hold the Emoticons key to open a small
To enter a number, touch ?123 , then touch the corresponding window with a set of Emoticons. Choosing a symbol with the
Emoticons key causes the Emoticons key to default to that
key.
symbol until you chose another symbol.
To enter common symbols, touch ?123 to switch to Symbols
Touch to use the Handwriting feature. For more
mode, then touch the corresponding key.
information, refer to “Using the Handwriting Feature” on
There are three pages of symbols. Touch 1/3 to switch to page 51.
the next page.
Touch to view the clipboard and manage saved text.
Touch and hold a vowel key (A, E, I, O, U, or Y) or the C, N, or
S key to open a small window where you can chose an
accented vowel or other alternate letter. Slide to the letter
until it is highlighted, and release.
Entering Text 44
Using XT9 Predictive Text 6. Begin typing a word.
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction A list of word options displays.
and regional error correction, which compensates for users
pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.
2. Touch Set up input methods.
The Language and input settings screen displays.
3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display
Samsung keyboard settings.
4. Touch the XT9 field so a green check mark appears
next to the field.
5. Touch the XT9 advanced settings field to modify XT9
7. Touch and then touch Add word to register a new
associated settings. For more information, refer to
word to XT9.
“Configuring the Samsung Keyboard” on page 197.
To add more words, see “Adding Words To Your Word
Note: The XT9 option is available only when ABC mode has List” on page 46.
been selected. 8. Continue typing your message. XT9 mode can be used
in portrait or landscape mode.
45
Adding Words To Your Word List Editing Text
To add more word options: You can edit the text you enter in text fields by cutting,
1. Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar. copying, or pasting text. These operations can be performed
The Set up input methods pop-up displays. within and across apps. However, some apps do not support
editing some or all of the text displayed while others may
2. Touch Set up input methods.
offer their own way to select text.
The Language and input settings screen displays. Editing Existing Text
3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display To edit text that you have entered:
Samsung keyboard settings. 1. Touch the text at the point you want to edit.
4. Touch XT9 advanced settings ➔ XT9 my words. The Cursor displays at the point you touched.
5. Touch Menu ➔ Add. 2. Touch and drag the Cursor to a better position, if
6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the word. necessary.
7. Touch Add. 3. Enter additional text or delete text by repeatedly
Deleting Words From Your Word List touching the Delete key.
To delete words from your word list: Copying, Deleting, or Replacing Text
1. Navigate to XT9 my words list. For more information, To select and copy, delete, or replace text:
refer to “Adding Words To Your Word List” on page 46. 1. Touch and hold the text or word you want to select.
2. Touch Menu ➔ Delete. The selected text is highlighted with a tab at
3. Touch the existing words you want to delete or touch each end of the selection.
Select all, and then touch Delete. 2. Touch and drag either tab to select more or less text.
4. Touch Delete.
Entering Text 46
Pasting Text
Tip: Touch Select all in the Application bar to select all text in
To paste previously copied text:
the field. Touch on another area of the screen or touch
Done to deselect the text. 1. Touch the text at the point you want to paste the copied
text.
3. Depending on the action you want to take for the The Cursor displays at the point you touched.
selected text, in the Application bar touch: 2. Touch the Cursor.
• Select all to highlight all text in the field. A pop-up displays.
• Cut to remove the selected text.
3. Touch Paste in the pop-up.
• Copy to save the selected text to the clipboard.
To paste text directly from the clipboard:
– or –
1. Touch the Clipboard key to display the text saved
Enter text by typing or speaking to replace the to the clipboard.
selection with what you type.
2. Touch a text block to paste that text where the Cursor is
– or – positioned.
Touch the Delete key to delete the selected text. Closing the Keyboard
To close the keyboard:
Touch Close Keyboard.
47
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a new way to enter text on touch screens. New Delete
Language Shift Paragraph Key
Instead of touching each key, use your finger to trace over
each letter of a word. For each word, place your finger on the
first letter and glide to the subsequent letters, lifting on the
last letter.
Enabling Swype
To enable the Swype keyboard:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
➔ Language and input.
2. Under Keyboards and input methods, touch the check Swype Numeric Space Bar Resize
Key Keyboard Keyboard
box next to Swype.
Symbols Speech
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check Keyboard Recognition
box.
Once Swype is enabled, when you touch Set up
input methods in the Status bar, Swype is listed as an
option.
Entering Text 48
This example shows how to enter the word “this”. Put your • Auto-capitalization: Swype recognizes and capitalizes the first
finger down on the “t” and, without lifting, glide it to the “h”, word of sentences. If you want to capitalize a word that is not at
then to the “i”, then over to the “s”. the beginning of a sentence, just glide above the keyboard before
gliding over the next letter.
• Contractions: Swype recognizes most words that include an
apostrophe, just swype the letters of the word, including the
apostrophe.
• Punctuation: Touch and hold a key to view a punctuation menu
and make a selection.
• Accented characters: Just glide through the letters of the word.
Swype usually recognizes the word and correctly accents the
letters.
• Error correction: If you make a mistake, double-tap on the word
you want to change.
Configuring Swype
Here are a few tips to get you started: Configure Swype to your preferences.
• Auto-spacing: When you finish a word, just lift your finger and
While entering text, touch and hold the Swype Key
start the next word.
to display the Settings screen. For more information,
• Double letters: Just “scribble” on the key. refer to “Configuring the Swype Keyboard” on
page 198.
49
Entering Symbols and Numbers Editing Keyboard
Using the Swype Keyboard: The Editing Keyboard provides a quick way to move the
• Touch and hold on a key to enter the symbol or number at the top cursor and highlight text. If the application in which you are
of the key. working supports editing, you can cut, copy, or paste
highlighted text.
• Touch and hold on a key until a menu of all characters available
on that key appears, then touch a character to enter it. To display the Editing Keyboard:
1. Swype from the Swype Key to the
• For more symbols, touch Shift, then touch the
corresponding key. 123 Numeric Key.
• Touch 2. Touch the edit key.

123 to switch to the numeric keyboard and quickly
enter numbers and mathematical operators.
• Touch to switch to the symbols keyboard. Touch to
view additional symbols.
• Touch ABC to display the alphabetic keyboard.
Using Swype Speech Recognition
Enter text by speaking. Swype recognizes your speech and
enters text for you.
Touch . At the Speak now prompt, speak the text
you want to enter.
Entering Text 50
Using the Handwriting Feature As you write, suggestions are offered in the word options
area in case the correct letters were not recognized.
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite
letters on your screen. Tab to Space Input Writing /
1. From a screen where you can enter text, activate the Settings Next Field Key Line Return Clipboard
Text
keyboard by touching a text input field on the screen. Input Select Word Delete Display Add
2. If necessary, touch Set up input methods in the Mode Language Options Key Keyboard Word
Status bar and then touch Samsung keyboard.
The Samsung keyboard displays.
3. Touch .
The handwriting pad displays with a Gesture guide.
4. Sweep the Gesture guide up or down. Touch OK to
close the pop-up.
The handwriting pad displays.
5. Use your finger tip to write out each character.
6. Touch to enter what you have written.
Note: To properly recognize the written characters and to Handwriting

prevent scratching of the LCD, do not use script. area
51
Handwriting Tips • Pen thickness: Change the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9
• For uppercase letters, write the letter larger than the lowercase pixels, as the examples demonstrate.
letters. • Pen colour: Change the pen color to black, red, blue, green, or
• Write a dash (horizontal line) to add a space. brown.
• Delete words by sweeping backward across them. • Recognition type: Set the way your tablet recognizes what you
• To display numbers and symbols, touch ?123 and then touch a write.
number or symbol key. Touch the button marked 1/3, 2/3, or 3/3 – Stroke recognition: The letters are entered in the text field as
to see more symbols and emoticons. Touch to exit the you write.
numbers and symbols keyboard. – Complete recognition: The letters are not entered in the text
• To return to the Samsung keyboard, touch . field until you touch Enter, which gives you time to choose
Handwriting Settings word options.
• Gesture guide: Displays a list of gesture that can be used with
To change the Handwriting settings:
1. Touch Settings. the handwriting feature.
The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays. • About: Describes the version, date, and manufacturer of the
handwriting software.
2. Touch Handwriting settings.
3. Press repeatedly to return to your message.
The following settings can be changed:
• Recognition time: Set the time it takes for your tablet to
recognize what you write. Choose from 100ms, 300ms,
500ms, 1000ms, or 2000ms.
Entering Text 52
Using Speech Recognition 3. At the Listening prompt, speak clearly and distinctly
You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input into the microphone.
feature, which lets you enter text by speaking. The Samsung The software converts your voice to text, which is
keyboard recognizes your speech and enters text for you. displayed in the message.
1. Touch Set up input methods in the Status bar. 4. Keep speaking to add more test.
The Set up input methods pop-up displays. 5. Touch Done to display the Samsung keyboard.
2. Touch Google voice typing to enable Voice Input.
For more information, refer to “Keyboards and Input Note: The Speech Recognition feature works best when you
break your message down into smaller segments.
Methods” on page 196.
53
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts
This section explains how to manage contacts and accounts. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
Accounts ➔ Accounts and sync.
Your device can synchronize with a variety of accounts. With 2. Touch Add account, then touch the account type.
synchronization, information on your device is updated with 3. Follow the prompts to enter your account credentials to
any information that changes in your accounts. complete the set-up process.
• Facebook: Add your Facebook account to sync Contacts. 4. The device communicates with account servers to set
• LinkedIn: Add your LinkedIn account to sync data with LinkedIn. up your account. When complete, your account
• Twitter: Add your Twitter Social Network Service to sync and displays in the Manage accounts area of the Accounts
access your data. and sync screen.
• Server: Add a server to sync and access your data. Contacts
• Email: Add and Email account to sync Contacts. For more Store contact information for your friends, family, and
information, refer to “Email” on page 68. colleagues to quickly access information or to send a
• Google: Add your Google account to sync your Contacts, Calendar, message.
and Gmail. For more information, refer to “Gmail” on page 64. To access Contacts:
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync: Add your Exchange account to From a Home screen, touch Apps
sync Contacts, Calendar, and Email. ➔ Contacts.
Setting Up Your Accounts Creating Contacts
Set up and manage your synchronized accounts with the 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Accounts and sync setting. ➔ Contacts ➔ .
Contacts and Accounts 54
2. Touch Device or an account. • Email: Enter an email address, then touch the Label tab
3. Touch the Photo ID to set up a photo to identify the to choose a label from Home, Work, Other, or Custom to
contact. create a custom label.
• Picture: Choose a photo from the Gallery. • Address: Enter an address, then touch the Label tab to
• Take picture: Display the Camera and take a photo of the choose a label from Home, Work, Other, or Custom to create
contact. a custom label.
4. Touch contact fields to display the keyboard and enter • Events: Touch to display an event label and field. Enter
information: the event date, then touch the Label tab to choose a label
from Birthday, Anniversary, Other, or Custom to create a
Tip: Touch the screen and swipe up or down to display custom event. Touch to add additional events.
additional fields or touch Next on the keyboard to move to • Groups: Touch this field to display the Select group screen. To
the next field.
assign the contact to one or more groups, touch the check box
next to each group. When enabled, a check mark
• Name: Enter a first name for the contact. Touch to enter a
appears in the check box. For more information about Groups,
Name prefix, First name, Middle name, Last name, and
see “Groups” on page 60.
Name suffix.
• Phone: Enter a telephone number, then touch the Label
tab to choose a label from Mobile, Home, Work, Work Fax,
Home Fax, Pager, Other, Custom to create a custom label, or
Callback.
55
5. Touch to add additional fields.Touch to remove an Updating Contacts
unused field. To update an existing contact:
6. Touch Add another field to add these additional fields: 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Phonetic name, Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, ➔ Contacts.
Website, Internet call, and Relationship. 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its
7. Touch Back to remove the keyboard. information.
8. When you finish entering information, touch Save. 3. Touch Edit.
– or – 4. Continue entering contact information. For more
Touch Cancel ➔ OK to cancel and discard information, refer to “Creating Contacts” on page 54.
changes. Deleting Contacts
To delete a contact:
Tip: Display a contact’s record and touch the Email field to
send an email, touch the Address field to display the
address on a map, or touch the Website field to link to the ➔ Contacts.
website. 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its
information, and then touch Delete. At the prompt,
touch OK.

Managing Photo IDs • Favorites: Show only your favorite, or starred, contacts. For
To remove or update a contact’s Photo ID: more information, refer to “Favorites” on page 62.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps • Contacts: Show all your contacts. Touch the Find contacts
➔ Contacts. field and enter a keyword to list contacts that contain that
2. Touch Edit. keyword.
3. Touch the Photo ID, then touch Remove, Picture, or Take 3. From the Contacts list, touch Menu to display all or
picture. some of these options:
• Delete contacts. Touch and check mark the box next to each
Contacts Display Options
contact you want to delete. Touch Delete and then touch OK.
There are various ways to display your Contacts and general
• Merge with Google: Merges the current contact with your
Contacts settings.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Google account contacts.
➔ Contacts. • Send email: Sends an email to the selected contact.
2. Touch Groups, Favorites, or Contacts, above the • History: Displays information about the selected contact.
Contacts List, to view contacts various ways: • Join contact: Join a contact to one or more other contacts. For
• Groups: Displays the possible Groups, such as Not assigned, more information, refer to “Joining Contacts” on page 59.
Co-workers, Family, Friends, and so on. The number of • Mark as default: If a contact has multiple email addresses, for
contacts in the group is displayed next to the group name. example, touch the field that should be the default value.
Touch a group name to show only contacts in that group. For • Share namecard via: Shares the selected namecard using
more information, refer to “Creating a New Group” on Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or through Wi-Fi Direct.
page 60. • Print namecard: Check mark the fields you want to print and
then touch Print. You can only print on a Samsung printer.
57
• Contacts to display: Select the contacts you want to display in
• Send individual contacts and namecards: Allows you
this inbox (All contacts, Google, Device, or Customized list).
to transmit single contacts, one at a time. The recipient
• Import/Export: Use the USB cable to import your contacts
must accept each namecard as it is received. This
from, or export your contacts to, a storage device, such as a
method of transmission ensures all contacts are
PC. For more information, refer to “Importing and
received.
Exporting Contacts” on page 60.
• Accounts: Displays the Accounts and sync screen so you can 4. From the Groups list, select a group and then touch
manage or synchronize this account. Menu to display these Group-specific options:
• Search: Search the group for a contact.
• Settings: Configure contact settings:
• Delete: Touch one or more groups and touch Done.
– Only contacts with phones: Touch to check the box to only
display contacts that have phone numbers. • Edit: Change the Group name or touch Add member to add or
– List by: List contacts by First name or Last name. delete group members.
– Display contacts by: Display contact names as First name • Add member: Add a new member to this group.
first or Last name first. • Remove member: Remove a selected member from this
group.
– Send contact: Sets parameters for sending contact
information: • Send email: To send an email to one or more members of the
group, touch and check mark the box next to each contact you
• Send all namecards: Allows you to transmit all of your
want to send to, or touch Select all, and touch Done.
current Contact entries at a single time. If the recipient
Touch Compose Email or Compose Gmail as the method for
device does not support this feature, some or all Contact sending the email.
entries might not be received.
• Change order: Changes the order of how the groups display.

Linked Contacts Separating Contacts
Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts, 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
including Google, Corporate Exchange, and other email ➔ Contacts.
providers. When you synchronize contacts from these 2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its
accounts with your device, you may have multiple contacts information.
for one person. 3. Touch Menu ➔ Separate contact.
Linking, or joining, imported contact records allows you to A list of Joined contacts displays.
see all the contact’s numbers and addresses together in one
contact entry. Linking also helps you keep your contacts 4. Touch ➔ OK to separate a joined contact.
updated, because any changes that your contacts make to The contact is removed from the list.
their information in the respective accounts is automatically
Sharing Contact Information
updated the next time you synchronize with the account.
Joining Contacts You can send a contact’s information by way of Bluetooth to
other Bluetooth devices or in an Email or Gmail as an
attachment.
➔ Contacts.
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its Note: Not all Bluetooth devices accept contacts and not all
information. devices support transfers of multiple contacts. Check
3. Touch Menu ➔ Join contact. the target device’s documentation.
4. Touch the contact you want to Join.
The joined contact’s information is displayed with the
➔ Contacts.
original contact’s information.
2. Touch Menu ➔ Share namecard via.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to join other contacts.
59
3. Touch Menu ➔ Import/Export.
Tip: Set up a contact record for yourself to share your
4. Touch Import from USB storage, Export to USB storage,
information with others.
or Share namecard via, then follow the prompts to
3. At the prompt, choose a sending method. Options are: complete the operation.
• Bluetooth: For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on Groups
page 139. Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts
• Email: For more information, refer to “Email” on page 68. faster or to quickly send messages to group members.
• Gmail: For more information, refer to “Composing and Creating a New Group
Sending Gmail” on page 66. Create a new group when you add or edit a contact.
• Wi-Fi Direct: To send Contacts entries directly to an external 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
device through a Wi-Fi connection ➔ Contacts.
4. Follow the prompts to send the contact information. 2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List.
Importing and Exporting Contacts 3. Touch .
To back up and restore your contacts information, you can 4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to enter a
export your contacts list to a storage device, such as a PC, or new Group name.
import your contacts list (previously exported) from a storage 5. Touch Save to save the new group name.
device.
1. Use the USB cable to connect your device to the Tip: Contacts can belong to more than one group. Just touch
storage device. the contact’s Groups field and touch each group.
➔ Contacts.

Once you create a new group, the Contacts List can be set to 3. Touch Menu ➔ Delete.
display only the contacts in that group. For more information, The groups that can be deleted display.
refer to “Contacts Display Options” on page 57.
4. Touch Select all, Starred in Android, or the name of
Renaming a Group each group to delete.
To rename a group that you created:
5. Touch Delete to delete the groups. Choose from
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Group only or Group and group members.
➔ Contacts.
Adding Group Members
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group you want to
rename. To add a contact to a group, just Edit a contact’s Group field.
For more information, refer to “Updating Contacts” on
3. Touch Menu ➔ Edit.
page 56.
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to enter a
To add multiple contacts to a group:
new Group name. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
5. Touch Save to save the new group name. ➔ Contacts.
Deleting Groups 2. Touch Groups and then touch the group to which you
To delete a group that you created: want to add members.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 3. Touch Menu ➔ Add member.
➔ Contacts. The contacts that can be added display.
2. Touch Groups and then touch any group you want to 4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to add.
delete.
5. Touch Done to add the contacts to the group.
61
Removing Group Members 3. Touch the Star next to the contact name so that it
To remove contacts from a group: turns gold .
Tip: You do not have to edit the contact to change the Starred
➔ Contacts.
status.
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group from which you
want to remove members. Accessing Favorites
3. Touch Menu ➔ Remove member. You can view your favorites two ways for fast viewing or
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove. messaging.
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts. To view your favorites list:
Contacts are removed from the group and the group 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
name is removed from each contact’s Group field. ➔ Contacts.
Favorites 2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch
Starred in Android.
Mark contact records with a gold star to identify them as
favorites. – or –
Adding Favorites Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.

To add a contact to the Favorites list: Only your starred contacts display.
➔ Contacts.
2. Touch a contact to display it.

Removing Favorites To remove one contact from your favorites list:
To remove one or more contacts from your favorites list: 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Contacts.
➔ Contacts. 2. Touch a contact to display it.
2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List. 3. Touch the Star next to the contact’s name so that it
3. Touch Menu ➔ Remove from favorites. turns gray to remove it from the Favorites list.
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.
63
Section 5: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive messages
and other features associated with messaging. Tip: To set up your Google account on your device, use
Accounts and sync settings. For more information, refer to
Types of Messages “Accounts and Sync” on page 189.
Your device supports these types of messages:
• Gmail: Send and receive Gmail from your Google account. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
• Email: Send and receive email from your email accounts, Setting Up Your Gmail Account
including Corporate Exchange mail. If you did not set up a Google account during the initial
• Google Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users. configuration, the first time you launch Gmail, your device
• Google Messenger: Use Google Messenger to bring groups of prompts you to set up your Google account.
friends together into a simple group conversation.
Note: You can use more than one Google account on your
Note: Your Wi-Fi-only device does NOT support voice calling device. To add another account, touch Menu
and messaging services. Please disregard any “dial” ➔ Settings ➔ ADD ACCOUNT.
and “message” related menus because some Gmail
options are identically set in all Android devices. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
The Add a Google Account screen displays.
Gmail 2. Touch Existing to sign in to an existing account.
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based • At the Sign in screen, use the on-screen keyboard to enter
email. your Google Email name and Password, then touch Sign in.
Messaging 64
– or – Managing Your Gmail Account
Touch New to create a new account. Use menu options to manage your Gmail account.
• At the Your name screen, enter your first and last name, and 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
touch Next. 2. Touch Menu for these options:
• At the Create email address screen, follow the prompts to • Manage labels: Determine settings for each label.
create a new account. • Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to
The Backup and restore screen displays. “Gmail Account Settings” on page 67.
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.
3. Read the backup and restore information, touch the
• Send Feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.
option to enable or disable it, and then touch Next.
4. The device communicates with the Google server to set Managing Your Gmail Conversations
up your account and synchronize your email. When In addition to managing your Gmail account, there are
complete, your Gmail displays in the Inbox. options for changing the status of one or more Gmail
conversations in an account.
Refreshing Your Gmail Account
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
Refresh your account to update your device from the Gmail
2. Touch the gray box to the left of one or more
servers.
conversations and then choose one of the following
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
options:
2. Touch Refresh in the Application Bar.
• Archive : Archive the conversations. Archived
conversations are assigned to the All Mail folder.
• Delete : Delete the conversations. Deleted conversations
are moved to the Trash folder.
65
• Change labels : Relocate the conversations to the Inbox, • Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to
Personal, Receipts, Travel, or Work folder and then touch OK. “Gmail Account Settings” on page 67.
• Mark as Read / Mark as Unread : Mark the • Help: Learn about using Gmail.
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is • Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.
marked as read, it has a gray background. Touch DONE Composing and Sending Gmail
to remove the check marks. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
Tip: To move a conversation to another folder, touch and drag 2. Touch Compose.
it to the folder tab. 3. Touch the To field to enter recipients. As you enter
names or email addresses, matching contacts display.
3. Touch Menu for these options: Touch a contact to add it to the field.
• Add star / Remove star: Mark (or unmark) conversations with 4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.
a yellow star. Starred conversations are listed in the Starred 5. Touch Compose email to enter the text of your email.
folder. Touch Done to remove check marks. 6. While composing a message, the following options are
• Mark important / Mark not important: Change the displayed:
importance indicator . Yellow indicates important. • + CC/BCC: Create Cc (copy) and Bcc (blind copy) fields in the
• Mute: New messages added to muted conversations bypass message. After creating the fields, touch to enter recipients.
your inbox so that the conversation stays archived in the All • Attach: Launch Gallery to select a photo to add to the
Mail folder. message.
• Report spam: Report the conversations as spam, which are
emails that violate the Gmail Program Policies and/or Terms of
Use.
Messaging 66
7. Touch Menu for the following options: • Auto-advance: Choose a screen to show after you delete or
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to archive a conversation.
“Gmail Account Settings” on page 67. • Message text size: Set the size of text in message displays.
• Help: Learn about using Gmail. • Clear search history: Remove previous searches you
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form. performed.
8. Touch SEND to send this message. • Hide pictures in messages: Stops pictures from displaying
– or – automatically in messages until you allow it for a sender.
Touch SAVE DRAFT to save a draft of this message. (Gmail account settings)
Gmail Account Settings Each account has independent settings:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail. • Priority Inbox: This setting is only available if you have
2. Touch Menu ➔ Settings for settings: configured Gmail on the web to show Priority Inbox. If available,
General settings you can set Priority Inbox as the conversation list to open when
you have new mail, rather than Inbox.
• Confirm before deleting: Have your device prompt you to
confirm Delete actions. • Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email
appear in the Status Bar.
• Confirm before archiving: Have your device prompt you to
confirm archiving actions. • Ringtone & vibrate: If Email notifications is enabled, touch this
• Confirm before sending: Have your device prompt you to field to set the following options:
confirm Send actions. – Sync messages: Sync options are: None, Last 30 days, or All.
– Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email
appear in the Status Bar.
67
– Ringtone: Choose a ringtone for new email notifications or use Email
the default ringtone and then touch OK. Use Email to view and manage all your email accounts in one
– Vibrate: Choose vibration settings for email notifications. application.
– Notify once: When enabled, a notification appears in the Status Configuring Email Accounts
Bar for new email, not for every new message. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email.
• Signature: Create a text signature to add to outgoing 2. At the Set up email screen, enter an Email address and
messages. Password, then touch Next.
• Gmail sync is ON/OFF: Indicates whether you have Gmail 3. Your account’s incoming server settings are different
synchronization turned on for this account in the Account and depending on the kind of email service for the account.
sync settings. Touch to open those settings. If you are asked What type of account?, touch the type
• Days of mail to sync: Set the number days to sync email for of account: POP3 account, IMAP account, or Microsoft
this Gmail account. Exchange ActiveSync.
• Manage labels: Choose which labels are synchronized. The Server settings screen displays. Enter the required
• Download attachments: Enable or disable auto-download of settings and touch Next. For more information, refer to
files attached to recent messages when connected through “Incoming Server Settings” on page 75.
Wi-Fi. 4. Review the Account options screen. Available options
About Gmail vary, depending on the provider:
• Displays information about the Gmail (Version, copyright • Peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to
information, Send feedback, Report a problem, Open source this account during peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic),
licenses, Privacy Policy). Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.
Messaging 68
• Off-peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent • Sync Email: When enabled, email from your account is
to this account during off-peak times. Options are: Push synchronized with your device’s email.
(Automatic), Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or • Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account
12 hours. are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.
• Period to sync email: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, set • Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are
whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month of synchronized with your device’s Calendar.
email on the tablet. • Sync Task: When enabled, tasks from your account are
• Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email. synchronized with your device’s Calendar.
Options are: Never, Every 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes, Every hour, • Automatically download attachments when connected to
Every 4 hours, or Once a day. Wi-Fi: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to
• Emails retrieval size: Set the maximum email retrieval size. recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi.
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or100 KB, 5. Touch Next to go to the next screen or touch Previous to
or All. go to the Apps screen.
• Period to sync Calendar: Set how much of the calendar for
this account to sync with your tablet. Options are: 2 weeks, 1, Note: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, the Activate device
3, or 6 months, or All calendar. administrator? screen may appear. Read the information
and touch Activate to continue.
• Send email from this account by default: When enabled,
email from your device is automatically sent from this account.
6. Enter an account name for the email account just
• Notify me when email arrives: When enabled, you receive added, which is displayed on the email screen, and
notifications when you receive new email sent to this account. enter Your name, if required.
7. Touch Done.
69
The device communicates with the appropriate server 2. Touch the drop-down menu at the top left of the
to set up your account and synchronize your email. screen to select:
When complete, your email appears in the Inbox for the • Combined view: View all email in a combined inbox.
account. • <Account Name>: View email for the account.
Managing Your Email Conversations
Note: To configure email account settings at any time, use
Menu ➔ Settings. Touch the account to display In addition to managing your Email account, there are
Account settings. options for changing the status of one or more Email
conversations in an account.
Adding Additional Email Accounts 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email.
To add additional email accounts: 2. Touch the box to the left of one or more conversations
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email. and then choose one of the following options:
• Star : Mark the conversations with a gold star and list
2. Touch Menu ➔ Settings ➔ Add account.
them in the Starred folder. Touch to make the changes.
3. Enter the Email address, Password, and so on.
– or –
Managing Your Email Accounts Flag : Touch Clear to clear all flags and check marks, touch
You can view email you receive for all accounts in the Complete to mark all conversations with a blue check mark, or
Combined view screen or you can view email accounts touch Set to set all flags. Set flags are gold.
individually. • Mark as Read / Mark as Unread : Mark the
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email. conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is
marked as read, it has a gray background.
Messaging 70
• Move to : Relocate the conversations to another folder in Composing and Sending Email
the current email account or in a folder within another email 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email.
account. 2. Touch an account, if you have more than one account
• Delete : Delete the conversations. set up, then touch Compose.
3. Touch Menu for these options: 3. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.
• Sort by: Choose a method for listing your email conversations. • If you are sending the email message to several recipients,
• View mode: Choose how to view your email conversations. separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as
Choices are: Standard view and Conversations view. many message recipients as you want.
• Create folder: Create a new main folder or touch an existing • Touch to add a contact to the field.
folder to create a sub-folder. • Touch +Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients.
Note: This option is not available for all email accounts. – Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
• Delete all: Delete all items for this email account. – Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
• New meeting invitation: Use S Planner to add an event or add • Touch +Me to add yourself as a recipient.
a task. For more information, refer to “Creating an Event or
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.
Task” on page 152.
5. Touch the body of the email to enter the text of your
• Settings: Display the settings for this email account. For more
email.
information, refer to “Account Settings” on page 73.
71
6. While composing a message, the following options Insert quick response: Insert text that you
may be displayed: frequently use in emails. For more
Priority: Set the email priority. Options are: information, refer to “Account Settings” on
High, Normal, or Low. page 73.
Tracking options: Touch Read receipt or Font size: Choose a text font size of 9, 10,12,
Delivery receipt and then touch OK to set the 14, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 36 points.
tracking options for this email.
Bold: Bold the following text. Touch again to
Security options: Set the email security turn off bold.
options. Options are: Encrypt and Sign.
Italics: This action italicizes the subsequent
Attach: Choose an attachment to add to the entered text.
message from the listed apps, such as My
Font color: Set the color of the text font. The
Files, Images, Video, Audio, and so on.
bar changes to the selected color.
Undo: Erase the previous input.
Background color: Set the color of the
background of the email.
Redo: Restore the previously erased input.
7. Touch Save to save the email to the Drafts folder,
Insert: Choose an item to insert into the
Send to send the email, or Delete to delete the
message from the listed apps, such as
email.
Images, Memo, Contacts, and so on.
Messaging 72
Account Settings • Quick responses: Edit text that you frequently use in emails.
Account settings lets you configure handling of email on your Touch an email account to display the following
device. settings:
Common settings
Note: Available settings may depend on the email account and
include setting how much email to synchronize, creating • Account name: Enter a name to identify this account.
signatures for email you send, and other handling • Your name: Enter a name to be used on emails.
options. • Add signature: Touch the box to enable or disable this option.
A check mark indicates that the following signature is
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email.
added to emails.
2. Touch Menu ➔ Settings, then touch General
• Signature: Enter a signature to add to email from this account.
Preferences. The following options display:
• Default account: When enabled, email from your device is
• Display after deleting message: Set the screen to show after
automatically sent from this account.
deleting a message. Choices are: Next message, Previous
message, or Message list. • Always Cc/Bcc myself: Lets you manage whether your email
address is included in the Cc or Bcc lines.
• Message preview line: Choose a message preview line
amount. Options are: None or 1, 2, or 3 lines. • Forward with files: Touch the check box to include any file
attachments when you forward an email.
• Email header: Set whether the Subject or Sender of the email
is shown as the header. • Recent messages: Limit the number of recent messages that
are displayed on your device. Options are: 25, 50, 75, 100,
• Confirm deletions: Touch the box to enable or disable this
200, or Total.
option. A check mark indicates that deletions must be
confirmed. • Show images: Display images in an email.
73
Data usage • Out of office settings: Lets you set how email is handled for a
• Sync email: Touch the box to enable or disable this option. A defined period of time, while you are unable to check your
check mark indicates email sync is enabled. email.
• Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email • Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size,
sent to this account during. Options are: Never, every 5, 10, 15, which ranges from 0.5 KB to 100 KB or allow All email to be
or 30 minutes, every hour, every 4 hours, or once a day. retrieved.
• Auto download attachments: Enable or disable • Period to sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your
auto-download of files attached to recent messages when account are synchronized with your device’s Calendar.
connected through Wi-Fi. • Security options: Set various security options for the account.
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size, • In case of sync conflict: Set whether to update the server or
which ranges from 2 KB to 100 KB. your tablet if there is a conflict of information between them.
Exchange ActiveSync settings • Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times.
Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times.
• Period to sync email: Set whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1
or 2 weeks, or 1 month of email on the tablet. Notification settings
• Empty server trash: If available, indicates whether to delete • Email notifications: When enabled, the New Email icon
the contents in the server trash. appears in the Status Bar when a new email arrives.
• Sync schedule: Set up your peak and off-peak schedule • Select ringtone: Choose a ringtone for email notifications for
controls, which determines when your tablet checks the email this account.
service for new email. • Vibrate: When enabled, email notifications for this accounts
are accompanied by vibration.
Messaging 74
Server settings Incoming Server Settings
• Exchange server settings: Configure incoming server Your account’s exchange or incoming server settings are
settings. different, depending on the kind of email service for the
account: POP3, IMAP, or Exchange ActiveSync.
– or –
Incoming settings: Configure incoming server settings. For more
• Domain\ user name: If your Exchange ActiveSync server requires
information, refer to “Incoming Server Settings” on that you specify a domain, enter it before the backslash.
page 75. Otherwise, just enter your username (the part before
• Outgoing settings: Configure outgoing server settings. For @emailprovider.com in your email address) after the backslash.
more information, refer to “Outgoing Server Settings” on The backslash is optional when only entering your username. The
page 76. Email app enters the correct syntax for domains and usernames
• Sync Email: When enabled, email from your account is when communicating with the server.
synchronized with your device’s email. • Password: The password for your email account, which should be
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account filled in.
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts. • Exchange server / IMAP server: The fully resolved domain
• Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are name of your email service provider’s server, for example,
synchronized with your device’s Calendar. mail.emailprovider.com.
• Sync Task: When enabled, tasks from your account are • Use secure connection (SSL) / Security type: Check this option if
synchronized with your device’s tasks. your server requires you to connect to the server securely, or if
you prefer to connect securely.
75
• Use client certificate: Use a client certificate for messaging • Require sign-in: Check this option to enter a username and
security. password for your SMTP server, if your email service provider
• Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port requires that you enter them to send email.
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port • User name: Your username on the SMTP server (this may not be
number if your email service provider requires it. the same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for
• IMAP path prefix: Enter an IMAP path prefix, if required. incoming mail). Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.
Outgoing Server Settings • Password: Your password on the SMTP server (this may not be the
If you use an IMAP or POP3 account for receiving email, you same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for incoming mail).
typically use an SMTP server to send email from that Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.
account. Exchange ActiveSync accounts do not have Google Talk
separate outgoing server settings.
Talk is Google’s instant messaging and audio and video chat
• SMTP server: The fully resolved domain name of your email service. You can use it to communicate, in real time, with
service provider’s SMTP server, for example, other people who also use Google Talk on another Android
smtp.emprovider.com. tablet or phone or on a computer.
• Security type: Select the security type required by your email
service provider. Select the SLL (Accept all certificates) option Tip: Talk requires that you have a Google account. To set up
for your security type to accept a server certificate from your your Google account on your device use Accounts and
sync settings. For more information, refer to “Accounts
SMTP server that is self-signed, out of date, or in some other way
and Sync” on page 189.
not accepted by the Email application.
• Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port
number if your email service provider requires it.
Messaging 76
Open Talk and Sign In Your friend’s address in Talk is a Gmail or other email
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Talk. address that is configured to connect to Google Talk.
If you are not signed in to a Google account, the Add a If your friend accepts your invitation, they are added to
Google Account screen displays. your Friends list in Talk and you can share each others
2. Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account, status in Talk and other applications.
or New to create a Google account. View and Accept an Invitation to Become a
For more information, refer to “Setting Up Your Gmail Friend
Account” on page 64. When a contact invites you to become a friend in Google Talk,
you receive a notification in the System Bar and the
Note: If you have already set up your Google account, you are invitation displays in your Friends list.
automatically logged in. Just touch the account. 1. Touch the invitation.
2. Touch Accept, if you want to accept the invitation and
Once sign in is complete, the Talk main screen
chat, Decline, if you do not want to chat with and share
displays.
your Google Talk status with the sender right now, or
Invite a Friend to Chat Block, if you do not want to receive any more
You can invite anyone with a Google Account to become your invitations from that person.
friend in Google Talk, so you can chat with each other and If you touch Accept, the friend is added to your Friends
view each other’s online status. list in Talk and you can share your status in Talk and
1. While viewing your Friends list, touch Add friend. other applications.
2. Enter your friend’s address and touch DONE.
77
Talk Options • End chat: End this chat session.
There are several options that are available while viewing • Go off the record/Stop chatting off the record: Set whether
your Friends list and some that are only available while you you want to stop saving your chat to the chat history.
are chatting. • Friend info: Display information about the friend with which
1. Touch to search your Talk messages or the current you are chatting. The following options are also displayed:
message for a word. Use the on-screen keyboard to – BLOCK: Keeps this person from sending you messages and
enter a search term. Touch on the keyboard to removes the person from your Friends list.
search your Talk messages. – REMOVE: Remove the friend as if you never accepted their
2. Touch to invite another friend to chat, to invitation. However, the friend is not blocked.
invite a friend to video chat, or to invite a friend to
voice chat. Note: If you touch the REMOVE option, touch Add friend ➔
3. Touch a Friend’s entry to display the Chat entries for Send chat invitation to, to make the Friend visible again.
that Friend.
• Add to chat: Choose another friend to invite to this
4. Touch Menu to display the following options,
conversation.
which are available while viewing your Friends list and
some that are only available while you are chatting. • Clear chat history: Remove the history of this chat from your
• Display options: To set the way your friends list is sorted, device.
touch Availability, Name, or Recency. • Settings: Offers various settings for Google talk. For more
• End all chats: End all chats in which you are engaged. information, refer to “Google Talk Settings” on page 79.
• Sign out: Sign out of Google Talk and display the Talk main • Help: Displays additional help information.
screen. • Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.
Messaging 78
Google Talk Settings CHAT NOTIFICATIONS
Use Google Talk Settings to configure your Talk account. If • IM notifications: Set whether to open a dialog, display a
you have more than one account, each maintains its own notification in the System Bar, or neither, when you receive a
Talk settings. text chat.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Talk. • Notification ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when
2. Touch Menu ➔ Settings, then touch an account for you receive a text chat.
options:
• Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only
GENERAL when silent, or Never.
• Mobile indicator: Check and your friends see an outline of an VOICE & VIDEO CHAT
android next to your name in their Friends list when you are • Video chat notifications: Set whether to open a dialog or
signed into Google Talk on a tablet or phone.
display a notification in the System Bar when you are invited to
• Away when screen off: Check to change your Talk status to a video chat.
Away when your screen turns off. When unchecked, your
• Video chat ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when
status is not changed. you receive an invitation to a video chat.
• Invitation notifications: Show notification when a friend • Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only
invitation arrives.
when silent, or Never.
• Default video effect: Set the video image stabilization.
79
ACCOUNT Messenger
• Blocked friends: Displays a list of friends you have blocked. With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends
Touch a blocked friend and then touch OK to unblock the together into a simple group conversation, putting everyone
friend. on the same page. When you get a new conversation in
• Clear search history: Erases your search history. No previous Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device.
searches are shown until you search for new words. To get started, touch the Messenger icon on the home screen
of the Google+ app or use the Messenger icon on your
• Manage account: Opens the Accounts and sync settings. For
Applications screen.
more information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on
page 189.
➔ Messenger.
ABOUT
The Messenger screen displays.
• Terms & privacy: Displays the Google Talk terms of use and
2. Touch Learn more in the center of the screen and then
privacy policies.
touch a topic to learn more about using Google
Messenger.
Messaging 80
Section 6: Internet and Social Networking
This section describes the various Internet and social To get started:
networking applications available on your device such as 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Google+, Internet, Latitude, Local, Maps, Navigation, Google ➔ Google+.
Play™ Books, Google and Voice Search, and YouTube. The Google+ home screen displays.
Google+
2. Touch Menu ➔ Help and then touch a topic to
Share updates and see what is going on around you with
learn more about using Google+.
Google+ for mobile.
• Share your thoughts and location. Internet
• Instantly upload your photos and videos as you take them. Your device is equipped with a full HTML Browser that allows
you to access the Internet.
• Get updates from your circles in the stream.
• Check in to a place. Tip: Internet displays by default as a Primary shortcut on the
• Make plans on-the-go with group messaging. Home screen.
• View posts from people around you.
From the Home screen, touch Internet.
– or –
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Internet.
The Most visited screen displays.
81
Entering Text in a Field
• While browsing, touch a text field to display the virtual QWERTY
keyboard to enter text.
Zoom
• Tap the screen twice to zoom in or out.
• Use two fingers, such as your index finger
and thumb, to zoom out by making an
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to

Navigating the Internet landscape mode.
The following options are available for Internet navigation.
Selecting Items On a Page
Command Keys
While browsing, use gestures and menus to navigate:
• Touch Back or to return to the previous page.
• Touch an item to select it.
• Touch and hold Back to display a list of Most visit pages.
• Touch a hyperlink to follow the link.
• Touch Forward to go forward to a recent page.
• Touch and hold on a hyperlink for these options:
• Touch Refresh to reload the current page.
– Open: Open the linked page.
Touching and Dragging – Open in new window: Open a new window to display the linked
• Touch and drag your finger on the screen to navigate pages and page.
to reposition pages within the screen. – Save link: Save the linked page to Download history.
Internet and Social Networking 82

– Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard. Entering a URL
– Select text: Copy the link text to the clipboard. Access a website quickly by entering the URL.
• Touch and hold an image for the additional options: 1. From the Home screen, touch Internet.
– Save image: Download an image. View downloaded images in 2. Touch the URL field at the top of the screen, then enter
Gallery.
the URL using the virtual QWERTY keyboard.
– Copy image: Copy an image to the clipboard.
– View image: View the image source. As you enter characters, potential matches display.
– Set as wallpaper: Use the image as your home screen
wallpaper. Note: Use the Delete key to clear the URL field, if
necessary.
Using Browser Windows
You can have multiple windows open at one time and easily 3. Touch a match to complete the URL.
switch between windows. – or –
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet.
Continue entering characters and touch the Go key to
2. To open a new window, touch at the top of the
load the page.
screen.
3. To switch to another open window, touch its tab at the Copying Fields or Text
top of the screen. Copy information from a webpage to the clipboard for
pasting, searching, or sharing.
4. To delete an open window, touch the tab at the top of
the screen, and then touch .
83
Selecting, Copying, and Pasting Text 4. To paste the copied link or URL, navigate to the desired
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet. field (or to another application), then touch and hold in
2. Browse to a webpage. a text field and touch Paste on the pop-up menu.
3. On the webpage, touch and hold on the text until you Using Bookmarks
see the text you want highlighted, then stop touching While browsing, bookmark a site to quickly access it later.
the screen. Creating a bookmark
The text is highlighted. 1. From the Home screen, touch Internet.
4. Touch and drag the tabs to the left or right to 2. Browse to a website, then touch Add bookmark.
select more or less text. The Add bookmark options list displays. Confirm the
5. Touch Copy at the top of the screen to copy the Name and URL Address for the bookmark.
selected text or touch Done to stop. 3. In the Folder field, touch the drop-down menu, and
6. To paste the copied text, navigate to the desired field touch Homescreen, Bookmarks, or a folder.
(or to another application), then touch and hold in a text 4. Touch OK to save the bookmark.
field and touch Paste in the pop-up. A gold star displays on the Bookmarked page.
Copying and Pasting a Hyperlink or URL
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet.
2. Browse to a webpage.
3. Touch and hold on the link or URL, then touch Copy link
URL on the pop-up menu.

Accessing Bookmarks and History 4. On the History tab, touch Today, Yesterday, Last month,
Launch a bookmarked page or reload recent pages. Older, or Most visited to use these options:
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet. • Touch a page to reload it.
2. Touch Bookmarks, History, and Saved pages. • Touch the next to a page to bookmark it. Touch a gold
3. On the Bookmarks tab, use these options: star next to a page to remove the bookmark.
• Touch a bookmark to load the page. • Touch and hold on a page for these options:
• Touch and hold on a bookmark for these options: – Open: Open the webpage.
– Open: Open the bookmarked page. – Open in new tab: Launch the webpage in a new window.
– Open in new tab: Open the linked page in a new window. – Add bookmark/Remove from Bookmarks: Bookmark the
– Edit bookmark: Make changes to the bookmark description. page or remove the bookmark for this page.
– Add shortcut to home: Create a bookmark on the Home – Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Social Hub,
screen. or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link.
– Share link: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Social Hub, – Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.
or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link. – Remove from history: Remove the record of this page.
– Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard. – Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home
– Delete bookmark: Remove the bookmark. page.
– Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home 5. On the Saved pages tab, use these options:
page. • Touch a page to reload it.
• Touch and hold on a page and then touch Delete saved page
to remove the page from Saved pages.
85
Internet Menu • Print: Print the current screen or page to a Samsung printer.
While viewing a webpage, touch Menu for the following • Settings: Configure web settings. For more information, refer to
options: “Internet Settings” on page 86.
• New tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a new tab. Internet Settings
• New incognito tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a Use the browser settings to customize the browser.
new tab, and the pages you view in the new window will not 1. From the Home screen, touch Internet.
appear in your browser history or search history. See the 2. While viewing a webpage, touch Menu ➔ Settings.
on-screen explanation of going incognito.
Customize the Browser by using the following options:
• Add shortcut to home: Add the URL for this webpage as a
shortcut on the first home screen. General
• Share page: Use Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, Social Hub, or • Set home page: View and set the default first page that
Wi-Fi Direct to send the webpage URL. displays when you launch Internet.
• Find on page: Search for content on the current page. • Form auto-fill: Enable or disable form auto-fill to complete
• Desktop view: Your browser displays a website in a modified Internet forms with a single click.
format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a • Auto-fill text: If Form auto-fill is enabled, set up the following
website the same way it would appear on a PC. information:
• Save for offline reading: Saves the webpage so you can read it – Full name: Enter your name.
later even when offline. – Company name: Enter a company name.
• Downloads: View and manage recent downloads. – Address line 1: Enter your address.

– Address line 2: Enter any additional address information. • Clear form data: Deletes saved form information.
– City/Town: Enter your city and town. • Enable location: When enabled, sites you visit can request
– County: Enter your county. access to your location.
– Zip code: Enter your ZIP code. • Clear location access: Clear location access for all websites.
– Country: Enter your country. • Remember passwords: When enabled, saves user names
– Phone: Enter your telephone number. and passwords for sites you visit, to make future visits easier.
– Email: Enter a valid email address. • Clear passwords: Clear all saved user names and passwords.
Privacy and Security Accessibility
• Clear cache: Delete content and databases stored on the • Force zoom: Override the website's request to control zoom.
device. • Text size: Use the Preview field and the following controls to
• Clear history: Delete the list of previously-visited pages. configure text size:
• Show security warnings: When enabled, the browser warns – Scale text up and down: Scale the text size up or down using
you if there is a problem with a site’s security. a slider bar.
• Accept cookies: When enabled, allows the browser to save – Zoom amount on double tap: Set how much to zoom when
and read cookie information used by webpages. you double-tap the screen, from 175 to 225 percent.
• Clear all cookie data: Delete cookie information saved to the – Minimum font size: Set the minimum font size, which can
device. range from 1 point to 24 points.
• Remember form data: When enabled, stores information you
enter into forms to make future forms easier.
87
• Inverted screen rendering: Use the Preview screen and the • Open pages in overview: When enabled, displays an overview
following controls to configure inverted screen rendering: of newly-opened pages.
– Inverted rendering: Enable the display of websites with • Auto-fit pages: When enabled, Internet automatically sizes
inverted colors – black becomes white and vice versa. webpages to fit your device’s display.
– Contrast: If Inverted rendering is enabled, use this slider to set • Block pop-ups: When enabled, blocks pop-up windows.
the contrast, which can range from 100 to 300 percent. • Text encoding: Choose a default character set for webpages.
Advanced • Reset to default: Clear all browser data and reset all settings to
• Select search engine: Choose a search engine from Google, the factory defaults.
Yahoo!, or Bing. Bandwidth management
• Open in background: When enabled, new windows open • Preload search results: Enable the browser to preload high
behind the current window. confidence search results in the background to help speed up
• Enable JavaScript: When enabled, Internet automatically runs searches. Options are: Never, Only via Wi-Fi, or Always.
JavaScript scripts on pages you visit. • Load images: When enabled, images are automatically loaded
• Enable plug-ins: When enabled, Internet automatically loads when you visit a page. When disabled, images are indicated by
and runs plug-ins on pages you visit. a link, which you can touch to download the picture.
• Website settings: View and manage settings for individual
websites.
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,
or Close.

Labs 3. Swipe inward from the left or right edge of the screen
• Quick controls: When enabled, the Application and URL bars to access quick controls.
are hidden. To access the hidden controls, swipe inward from
the left or right edge of the screen to access Quick Controls. For
more information, refer to “Internet Quick Controls” on
page 89.
• Google Instant: When enabled, you can use Google Instant
when you use Google Search to show results as you type.
Enabling this option can increase data use.
Internet Quick Controls
Use Quick Controls to maximize your viewing area while 4. Without lifting your finger, move to an option and then
browsing the internet. lift your finger to initiate the option.
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet. 5. To cancel, display the Quick controls and touch
2. While viewing a webpage, touch Menu ➔ Settings Menu ➔ Settings ➔ Labs and touch Quick controls
➔ Labs, and then touch Quick Controls to enable the to uncheck it.
function.
The Application and URL bars are hidden.
89
Latitude 5. Touch Home ➔ Apps ➔ Latitude.
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 30
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your meters.
location. Sharing Your Location with Friends
You must first set up your tablet to use wireless networks to 1. From the Latitude map screen, touch Latitude
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when to display your Latitude list of friends. At first, only your
Wi-Fi is enabled.
name is displayed.
To enable Wi-Fi:
2. Touch Menu ➔ Add friends.
3. Touch Select from Contacts and touch a contact
➔ Settings.
– or –
2. Touch Location services ➔ Use wireless networks.
Touch Add via email address, enter an email address,
A green check mark indicates the feature is
and touch the Send key or close the keyboard and
enabled.
touch Add friends.
3. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the
4. At the Send sharing requests prompt, touch Yes.
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi” on page 137.
your location marked on a map. They will also receive
4. Log on to your Google account. instructions on how to view your location from the
To create a Google account or set up your Google Internet or use Latitude on their device, if it is available.
account on your device use Accounts and sync settings. Once they acknowledge your request, their location will
For more information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on display on your tablet. They can share their location
page 189. from their computer, phone, or tablet.
For more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude. • Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display. Choose from
Latitude Menu Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps,
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Latitude. Bicycling, or Wikipedia. This option only displays in portrait
2. Touch Latitude , if necessary. mode.
3. Touch Menu for these options: • Latitude: Allows you to find your friends and family on a map
• Add friends: Share your location with friends. For more and share with people you choose.
information, refer to “Sharing Your Location with • My Places: Displays a list of Starred places.
Friends” on page 90. • Offers: Notifies you if there are interesting offers nearby.
• Check in: Touch a location to check-in so others will know your • Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to
location. “Maps Settings” on page 94.
• Refresh friends: Update your Latitude list of friends. • Help: Launches Google mobile Help.
• Show stale friends / Hide stale friends: Show or hide friends Local
depending on the accuracy of their Latitude information. Local is an application that uses Google Maps and your
• Location settings: Configures the location reporting settings. location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,
For more information, refer to “Maps Settings” on page 94. Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map. locations.
• Local: Launch the Local app. For more information, refer to The Local application allows you to find the best sources for
business information across the web, including business
“Local” on page 91. This option only displays in portrait
listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and
mode.
other related information. Business owners can provide
additional details, such as photos, hours of operation, and
coupons.
91
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Local. Maps
2. Touch Choose your location and touch My current Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,
location or Enter an address. To enter an address, use and other location-based information.
the on-screen keyboard and then touch OK.
3. Touch one of the business categories to search for a Tip: A shortcut to Maps displays on the main Home screen by
default.
particular business.
All of the businesses in that category that are close to
you display. Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some
features require Standalone or Google location services.
4. Touch a business in the list to see more details about it.
For more information, refer to “Location Services” on
The business details such as address, phone, website, page 191.
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews
from around the web and from Google users. From the Home screen, touch Maps.
5. Touch your location at the bottom of the Local pop-up – or –
to write a review, check in here, view reviews and From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Maps.
details, or choose another location nearby.

Navigating the Map • Local: Launch the Local app. For more information, refer to
Zooming “Local” on page 91. This option only displays in portrait
• Double-tap on the screen to zoom in. mode.
• Use two fingers, such as your index finger • Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display. Choose from
and thumb, to zoom out by making an Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps,
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom Bicycling, or Wikipedia. This option only displays in portrait
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out. mode.
• Join Latitude/Latitude: Join Latitude, to share your location
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to with friends you choose and Google.
landscape mode.
• My Places: Display starred locations.
Scrolling • Offers: Notifies you if there are interesting offers nearby.
• Touch and drag on the screen to reposition the map in the display. • Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to
Touch “Maps Settings” on page 94.
• Touch an icon on the map to display information about the • Help: Learn about Google maps.
location. For example, your location is indicated by a flashing
Tip: Local and Layers display in the Application Bar in
and a pop-up that says My Location.
landscape mode.
Maps Menu
1. From the Home screen, touch Maps.
2. While viewing a map, touch Menu for these
options:
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.
93
Other Map Options Directions: Displays the Directions pop-up. Enter My
Touch the indicated icon to use these additional Map options: Location and End point or touch the button to the right
Search Maps: Use the keyboard to enter your request of the fields to choose your current location, a
to Search the map for a city, location, and so on. contact’s location, or to touch a point on the map.
Suggestions are displayed as you type. Touch the automobile, bus, bicycle, or walking icon
for the appropriate directions. Then touch Go to
Speak: Just speak a city, location, and so on, to
display a list of directions. Touch the Directions list
display.
and scroll up or down. Touch an entry in the
Compass: Set the map to always display north at the Directions list to show the point mentioned on the
top of the screen or to automatically rotate like a map.
compass, keeping north on the map facing north,
Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display.
and so on. Your device may have to be calibrated the
Choose from Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines,
first time you use this feature. Follow the on-screen
Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, or Wikipedia.
instructions.
Local: Launch the Local app. For more information,
Maps Settings
refer to “Local” on page 91.
Use the Maps settings to customize your Maps application.
1. From the Home screen, touch Maps.
2. Touch Menu ➔ Settings to set the following Maps
options:
• Display: Set the following Maps display options:
– Zoom Buttons: If enabled, the zoom in (+) and zoom out (-)
buttons are displayed on the map.
– Scale bar: If enabled, the scale bar is displayed on the map, – Automatic check-ins: Checks you in to places that you have
which shows the scale of the map in feet and meters. designated.
– Bubble action: Show a bubble action on bubbles. Options are: – Check-in notifications: Enables notifications that suggest
Get directions, Navigation (driving), Call, or Street view. places to check in.
• Cache – Manage your places: View and modify your automatic check-
– Clear map tile cache: Touch OK to clear map tile cache. ins and muted places.
• Location settings: These settings display if you have joined • Switch Account: Choose a different Google account. This
Latitude. option only appears if you have added more than one Google
– Location reporting: To update your location automatically, set account on your device.
the following options: • Labs: Access experimental features.
• What’s New: Link to Google Play Store where you can check
• Detect your location: Enable or disable whether your
for a Maps update.
location is updated automatically.
• About: View information about Maps.
• Set your location: Set your location manually.
• Feedback: Display a Maps feedback form.
• Do not update your location: Your friends cannot see
your automatic location. • Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google
Maps, including the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, Legal
– Enable location history: This history is only seen by you. Notices, and Web History.
– Manage your friends: Add or remove friends who can see
your location.
– Sign out of Latitude: Signs you out of Latitude and launches
the Maps application.
95
Navigation 5. Touch Menu for the following options:
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and to get • Route options: Set whether directions should Avoid
walking or driving directions. highways and Avoid tolls.
• Settings: Display Navigation settings:
Note: You must first create a Wi-Fi connection to use – Screen dimming: Enable or disable screen dimming, which
Navigation.
lets the screen dim between instructions to save power.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps – Terms, privacy & notices: View Google’s Terms and
➔ Navigation. conditions, Privacy policy, and Legal notices.
2. Touch Accept to accept the Google Maps Navigation • Help: Display Navigation help information.
beta message. 6. To find a destination, touch an option:
3. Touch in the Application bar and then touch either • Speak destination: Say the name or address of your
Driving or Walking to describe the type of directions destination.
you want. • Type destination: Enter the destination.
4. Touch Map in the Application bar to see a map • Contacts: Choose a destination from a contact record.
(Driving) or a satellite image (Walking) of your area. • Starred places: Choose destinations you have marked as
favorites.
• Recent destinations: Choose from recent destinations. This
option is not available until a destination has been requested.

7. While navigating, touch: Play Books
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES: View information Use the Play Books app to read eBooks from the
about the current route and alternate routes. Internet-based Google Play™ Books service. Google eBooks
Directions List: View directions in a step-by-step is a new way to discover, buy, and enjoy your favorite books
list. online and offline.
SHOW MAP: Return to the map view after viewing You can read books online or mark them for availability
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES or the directions list. offline, so you can read them when you have no Internet
connection (such as on an airplane). You can also use Books
Layers: Choose map layers to display. as your starting point for browsing or searching for books on
line.
Menu: To display these options: 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
• Turn off voice/Turn on voice: Enable or ➔ Play Books.
disable voice-guided prompts. The Google Play Books main screen displays.
• Exit navigation: Close Navigation and
discard route information. Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google
• Search: Find a location. account. For more information, refer to “Setting Up Your
• Set destination: Choose or enter a Gmail Account” on page 64.
destination.
• Settings: Enable or disable screen dimming
and view Google’s Terms and conditions,
Privacy policy, and Legal notices.
• Help: Display Navigation help information.
97
2. To add more books to your library, touch SHOP in the • Refresh: If a book in your library does not appear on your
Application bar. device, use this option to update the display.
A pop-up displays a link to the Google Play Terms of • Accounts: Set the account to use.
Service. Read the document and touch Accept. • Help: Displays various Book help information. Touch Help
Browse the selection of Google eBooks, which are Center to get additional Google Play Books information.
arranged in categories like Featured, Top Selling, Top 5. Touch the cover of a book to start reading.
Rated, Top Free, and many more. Reading a Book
3. To find a book by title or author name, touch Once the book displays:
Search on the Play Books main screen or touch SHOP 1. Sweep across the screen to turn the page.
➔ Search. 2. Touch the screen to display or hide the following
4. On the Play Books main screen, touch Menu for options.
these options: 3. Touch for a table of contents.
• Make available offline: Mark books to make them available 4. Touch to set THEME (day or night), BRIGHTNESS,
offline. Touch below a book cover to mark it with a pin and TYPEFACE, LINE HEIGHT, TEXT ALIGNMENT, and FONT
then touch . Just reverse this process to remove books SIZE.
from your device. 5. Touch Search on the Play Books main screen or
• View as list / View as carousel: Set how you want to view touch SHOP ➔ Search.
your books.

6. Touch Menu for these additional options: 8. To contact customer support, report an issue, and
• Original pages / Flowing text: Display the pages of the book display more Google eBooks information, from a Home
in their original format or use your format settings. screen, touch Apps ➔ Play Books
• About the book: Displays the Google Play description of the ➔ Menu ➔ Help.
book. Search
• Share: Share the book by using Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Search the internet using the Google search engine.
Google+, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Available offline: Touch the check box to make the book Tip: The Google Search widget displays by default on all Home
available offline. screens. For information about displaying widgets on the
Home screen, see “Adding Widgets to a Home screen” on
• Read aloud / Stop reading aloud: Touch to let your device
page 29.
read the book to you.
• Help: Touch Help center, Contact us, or Report a problem to 1. From a Home screen, touch Google.
link the appropriate website. Touch Terms of Service, Privacy – or –
Policy, or Open source licenses to read those documents. The From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Search.
Play Books version number is also displayed.
2. Use the keyboard to enter search criteria to display
7. Touch and drag the slider at the bottom of the page to
matching searches.
display a different page, which is indicated by the
– or –
pop-up.
Touch and speak the search criteria slowly and
clearly. Google searches for the information and
displays results.
99
Suggestions display below the text entry area. 4. Touch the ACCOUNT tab to choose which Google
3. Touch a suggestion to search for that term. account you would like to use or add an account. Once
– or – you are signed in, touch ACCOUNT to display your
subscriptions, see your favorites, see you watch later
Touch on the keyboard to start the search.
list, manage your playlists, or upload a video.
A browser window displays the search results.
5. Touch Search YouTube and use the keyboard to
YouTube enter a keyword or phrase to find a YouTube video.
View and upload YouTube videos right from your device. Touch on the keyboard to initiate the search.
6. While browsing, touch Menu for these options:
Tip: A shortcut to YouTube appears on the main Home screen • Sign in / Sign out: Sign in, sign out, or add an account. You
by default. may have to sign in to use certain options.
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view
1. From the Home screen, touch YouTube.
information about the application.
– or –
• Help: Display YouTube help information.
From a Home screen, touch Apps
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.
➔ YouTube.
7. Touch a video thumbnail to view the video.
2. Touch the HOME tab to return to the main YouTube
page.
3. Touch the BROWSE tab to browse videos by categories
like Comedy, Education, Music, and so on. Touch the
desired category to display video thumbnails.

Options While Viewing a Video 3. Touch Menu for these options:
Use these options while viewing a video: • Copy URL: Copy the URL of the video to the clipboard. For
1. Touch Add to, which lets you add the video to your more information, refer to “Copying and Pasting a
watch later list or your favorites, or add a new playlist. Hyperlink or URL” on page 84.
2. Touch Share to use Google+, Social Hub, • Flag: Flag the video for YouTube review.
Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail to send the • Settings: Configure display and search settings and view
video’s URL. information about the application.
• Help: Display YouTube help information.
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.
101
Section 7: Music
This section explains how to use the music features of your Accessing the Music App
device including the Music app, the Music Player, and the 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Music Hub. ➔ Play Music.
Play Music App The Play Music app searches your online library and
The Play Music app contains a music player that plays music your device’s internal storage for music and playlists.
and other audio files that you copy from your computer or store This can take from a few seconds to several minutes,
online. depending on the amount of new music added since
you last opened the application.
Note: Some options described in this manual may not be
available until you sign in to your Google account. It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent
music, organized by album.
Google Play Music
Google PlayTM Music is a new service from Google that gives
you instant access to your personal music collection on the
Internet and your compatible Android devices without the
hassle of wires or syncing. For more information, visit
music.google.com.
Music 102
2. Swipe left or right to spin the carousel and browse
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid,
through your new and recent music.
list, or carousel, depending on the view.
3. Touch an album to open it.
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens Searching for Music
in the Music application by touching the Music To find music in your library:
application icon at the top-left of the Application 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
bar. ➔ Play Music.
Changing Library View 2. Touch Search.
You can change the way you view the contents of your 3. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
library. Touch on the keyboard to remove the keyboard.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search
➔ Play Music. box.
2. Touch the name of the current view, such as Recent,
4. Touch a matching song to play it, touch a matching
near the top-left of the Application bar.
album, artist, or playlist to view a list of its songs, or
3. Touch an option to set how you view your library.
touch next to an item in the list to play it, add it to
The choices are: Recent, Albums, Artists, Songs, a playlist, or shop for other music by the artist online.
Playlists, or Genres.
103
Changing Music Settings • Offline music only: Display only the music that is available
To change settings in the Music application: offline.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps • Hide labels / Show labels: Hide or show labels. This option is
➔ Play Music. not available in all library views.
2. Touch Menu. • Settings: Displays the Settings screen. Choose a Google
The following options display depending on the library account to use to connect to Google PlayTM Music and set the
view: Music settings as indicated on the screen. The Music app
version is also displayed.
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.
• Help: Opens the Browser with information about the Music
• Hide now playing bar / Show now playing bar: Hide or show
application.
the Now Playing bar that displays at the bottom of the screen.
You can return to the Now playing screen from other Music Listening to Music
screens by touching the name of the current song in the Now You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in
Playing bar. speakers, through a wired headset, or through a wireless
Bluetooth stereo headset. For more information, refer to
• Make available offline: In addition to playing the music that
“Bluetooth” on page 139.
you add to your online library, you can play music stored on
your device’s internal storage. Then you can listen to music Touch the Volume Key on the side of the
device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and
when you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some
drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the
of your online music available offline. For more information,
Volume Key to adjust playback volume.
refer to “Making Online Music Available Offline” on
page 109.
Music 104
Options While Selecting a Song Playing Music
The following options are available for playing songs, To play a song:
albums, or playlist, finding more information about artists, 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
finding more music, and deleting songs: ➔ Play Music.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.
➔ Play Music. – or –
2. Touch an album or song.
While viewing a list of songs, touch next to a song
3. Touch the label area under an item. and touch Play.
The following options display depending on the item
– or –
view:
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or
• Play: Plays the selected song, album, or playlist. genres, the label area under an item and touch
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing Play.
playlist.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you
• More by artist: View any other music in your library by the
touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts
artist that performs this song.
to play. The tracks in the current list play in order until
• Shop for artist: Launches Google to search for more songs by
you reach the end of the list (unless you choose a
the selected artist. repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops only if you
• Delete: Delete the song. stop it, even when you switch applications.
• Search: Search Amazon MP3, Internet, Music Player, Play
Music, or YouTube for an artist, album, or song.
105
Options While Playing a Song
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the
Music application, the Now Playing bar displays at the When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays.
bottom of the screen. You can use this to control There are various options and controls available while a song
playback or touch Menu ➔ Hide now playing bar. is playing:
Displaying the Now Playing Screen ➔ Play Music.
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return 2. Play a song. For more information, refer to “Playing
to the Now playing screen from other Music screens: Music” on page 105.
Touch the name of the current song in the Now Playing The Now playing screen displays.
bar. 3. Touch the SONG title to add the song to a playlist.
– or – 4. Touch the ARTIST name to view information about the
Touch the Music notification icon in the System artist associated with this song.
Bar, and in the Status Details panel, touch the song 5. Touch ALBUM to list and play the songs on the album.
title. 6. Touch Menu to display the following options:
You can also pause and resume playback and skip to • Settings: Displays the Music settings screen.
the next or previous song in the Status Details panel. – Google Play account: Choose a Google account to use to
For more information, refer to “Notifications” on connect to Google PlayTM Music and then set the Music settings
page 25. as indicated on the screen. This option only appears if you have
added a Google account on your device.
– Open source licenses: Displays the open source licenses for
Google Play Music.
Music 106
– Music version: The Google Play Music app version is
Touch to advance to the next song. Touch and
displayed.
hold to scan forward through the current song.
• Help: View online help from Google.
7. The Now playing screen contains several buttons that Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all
you can touch to control the playback of songs, songs, or disable repeat mode.
albums, and playlists:
When Shuffle mode is enabled, songs play in
Touch Thumbs up or Thumbs down to add the random order. When disabled, songs play in the
song to a Thumbs up or Thumbs down playlist. order they appear in List view.
Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch Creating a Playlist

and hold to scan backward through the current 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
song. ➔ Play Music.
Touch to pause playback. 2. Touch the Playlists library view.
3. Touch .
The New playlist pop-up displays.
Touch to resume playback
4. Touch the NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.
5. Touch OK to save the new playlist.
107
Adding Songs To a Playlist 3. Touch next to a playlist title.
To add a song to a new or existing playlist while the song is • Touch Play to play the songs in the playlist.
playing: • Touch Rename and use the keyboard to enter a new name for
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps the playlist.
➔ Play Music. • Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the playlist. Only the
2. Touch an album or song list and play a song. playlist is deleted. To delete individual songs, see “Options
3. Touch SONG. While Selecting a Song” on page 105.
4. If the Add to new playlist pop-up displays, touch the Shopping for Music at the Play Store
NAME field to enter a name for the playlist. To visit the Google PlayTM Store where you can find and buy
– or – music:
If the Add to playlist pop-up displays, touch the playlist 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
to which you want to add the song or touch New ➔ Play Music.
playlist to create a new playlist. 2. Touch Play Store in the Application Bar.
5. Touch OK. The Google Play Store music section displays.
The playlist is saved with the song added to it. 3. Touch Menu ➔ Help ➔ Music to view information
Playing, Renaming, or Deleting a Playlist about finding and buying music.
To play, rename, or delete a playlist:

➔ Play Music.
2. Display the Playlists library view.
Music 108
Making Online Music Available Offline A green pin indicates that the item is already
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online available offline.
library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal Gray pins appear next to the items you can make
storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no available offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen
Internet connection. To do this, make some of your online
shows how much space is available on your device for
music available offline.
music and other files.
Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to Dim green pins indicate songs or albums that you
your device. For more information, refer to “Synchronizing copied directly from a computer to your device.
with Windows Media Player” on page 144.
4. Touch the gray pin next to each item you want to make
To make your online music available offline on your device: available offline or touch a green pin to stop making it
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps available offline. You can switch to other views of your
➔ Play Music. library to make other kinds of items available offline as
well.
2. Change your library view to Albums, Artists, or
playlists. For more information, refer to “Changing 5. Touch Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen.
Library View” on page 103. The Music application starts downloading the items to
3. Touch Menu ➔ Make available offline and touch your device.
the album or playlist you want to make available
offline.
109
Viewing Your Music Library Managing Your Music
The Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy Searching for Music
from your computer. To find music in your library:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
➔ Music Player. ➔ Music Player.
The Music Player application searches your device’s 2. Touch Search.
internal storage for music and playlists. This can take 3. Type the name of an artist, album, or song.
from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search
the amount of new music added since you last opened box.
the application. It then displays your music in several
4. Touch a matching song to play it. Touch a matching
ways.
album, or artist to view a list of its songs.
2. Touch Songs, Playlists, Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders, Creating a Playlist
Composers, or Years to change the way you view the 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
contents of your library. ➔ Music Player ➔ Playlists.
3. Touch the Music application icon at the top-left of 2. Touch ➔ New playlist.
the Application bar to return to the previous Music
3. Touch the name field to enter a name for the playlist.
screen.
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.
Music 110
Renaming a Playlist 4. Touch Done to save the playlist.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Removing Songs from Playlists
➔ Music Player. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
2. Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch ➔ Music Player.
Menu ➔ Rename playlist. 2. Touch and touch a playlist.
3. Touch the name field to enter a new name for the All songs are displayed to the left of the playlist and the
playlist. songs in the playlist are displayed on the right, under
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist. the playlist name.
Adding Songs to Playlists 3. Touch to remove a song from the playlist.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 4. Touch Done to save the playlist.
➔ Music Player.
Changing the Order of a Playlist
2. Touch and touch a playlist. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
– or – ➔ Music Player.
Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch 2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.
Add music. 3. Touch Reorder to change the order of the songs.
All songs are displayed. Touch the grid on an entry and drag the entry to a
3. Touch next to each song you want to add or next to new position in the list.
Add all to add all songs to the playlist. 4. Touch Done to change the order and save the playlist.
The songs appear under the playlist to the right of the
songs list.
111
Playing a Playlist Changing Music Settings
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps To change settings in the Music application:
➔ Music Player. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
2. Display the Playlists library view. ➔ Music Player.
3. Touch Favorites, Most played, or Recently added, or 2. Touch Menu to display the following options:
touch a playlist title that you created. • Delete: Touch the box for any song or album you want to delete
4. Touch a song to start playing the playlist at that song. or touch the box for Select all to select every song or album. A
Deleting a Playlist check mark indicates the song or album is to be deleted.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Touch Delete to delete the selected items.
➔ Music Player. • Share via: Share your music by using AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct,
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist. Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail. Select the songs you want to share
3. Touch Delete in the Application bar. and touch Share.
4. Touch the box next to a playlist title. A check mark • Set as alarm tone: Choose a song and touch Set to use the
indicates the playlist is to be deleted. song as an alarm tone.
5. Touch Remove and then touch OK to delete the selected • Settings: The following settings display:
playlist. Advanced
– Sound settings: Choose SoundAlive and Play speed
settings.
– Lyrics: Display the lyrics of the song, if available.
Music 112
– Music auto off: Set the option Off or set your music to turn off – or –
automatically after 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 1 hour and While viewing a list of albums or genres, touch the
30 minutes, or 2 hours. album thumbnail and then touch a song in the list of
Music menu songs on the album.
– Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that
The song you touch starts to play. The tracks in the
appear on the main music screen. A check mark next to
current list play in order until you reach the end of the
an option means that it is enabled.
list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise,
Listening to Music playback stops only if you stop it, even when you
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in switch applications.
speakers, through a wired headset or through a wireless
Bluetooth stereo headset.
Accessing the Music Player
If you navigate away from the Music Player application and
For more information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 139.
music is playing, you can change songs or easily return to
Touch the Volume Key on the side of the device
the Music Player:
to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on
1. Touch the Music notification icon in the System
the scale to set volume. You can also press the Volume Key
Bar.
to adjust playback volume.
2. In the Status Details, touch the song title to display the
Playing Music
Music Player. You can also pause and resume playback
To play a song:
and skip to the next or previous song in the panel. For
more information, refer to “Notifications” on page 25.
➔ Music Player.
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.
113
Music Player
Artist / Album Volume List Mode Select
Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from Favorite Song Title SoundAlive Info Device
your computer.
➔ Music Player.
2. Touch a song or playlist to begin playback.
The music player displays below (portrait mode) or to
the right (landscape mode) of the music listing.
3. Touch the music player to enlarge it and touch the
screen to display the sound and playlist controls.
4. During playback, use the sound and playlist controls:
• Favorite: Touch the star to mark the current song as a
favorite. Shuffle Progress Playback Time Repeat
Bar Controls Indicators
• Volume: Touch to toggle Vibration or Silent mode and Sound
mode, then touch and drag on the scale to set volume. You can • List Mode: Touch to switch to the list of songs.
also press the Volume Key on the side of the device to adjust • Select Device: Use AllShare to stream music to another
playback volume. device. For more information, refer to “AllShare” on
• SoundAlive: Touch to view and set SoundAlive options. page 148.
• Info: Touch to view information about the current song.
Music 114
• Shuffle: When enabled, songs play in random order. When Options While Playing a Song
disabled, songs play in the order they appear in List view. There are various options and controls available while a song
• Progress Bar: Touch and drag the end of the progress bar to is playing:
scan forward or backward through the current song. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
• Playback Controls: These buttons control the playback of ➔ Music Player, touch a song or an album, and
songs: then a song.
– Touch to advance to the next song. Touch and hold to 2. Touch the music player to enlarge it.
scan forward through the current song. 3. Touch Menu to display the following options:
– Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold • Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing
to scan backward through the current song. playlist.
– Touch to pause playback. Touch to resume playback. • Via Bluetooth: Play the current song by using a Bluetooth
• Time Indicators: The time indicators show, in minutes and device.
seconds, how much of the song has played (left) and the length • Share via: Share the current song by using Wi-Fi Direct,
of the song (right). Bluetooth, Email, or Gmail.
• Repeat: Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or • Set as alarm tone: Use the current song as an alarm tone.
disable repeat mode. • Settings: Displays Music Player settings. For more information,
refer to “Changing Music Settings” on page 112.
115
Music Hub 3. Touch one of the following options:
Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music • Featured: This is the Music Hub home screen. Displays top
manager and lets you access, buy, and download millions of albums, featured albums, top tracks, new releases, and more.
music tracks. Access top albums, top tracks, featured Touch an item to display more information and prices.
albums, and new releases. Music Hub allows you to search • Genres: Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre, such
for tracks, albums, and artists. Enjoy music samples before as pop, rock, jazz, comedy, and blues.
you download them directly to your Wi-Fi Galaxy Tab.
• Playlists: Displays downloaded playlists and your library of
Note: You must sign up for an account before accessing some songs and albums. Touch New to create a new playlist.
of the Music Hub options. • My page: Displays the following options:
– Basket: Displays songs that you have selected to buy. Touch
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Buy to start the purchase process. Touch Menu ➔
➔ Music Hub. Delete all to clear your basket or touch Remove to delete
2. Read the Disclaimer and touch Confirm to continue or songs from your basket.
Back to exit. – Purchase List: Displays a list of your purchases.
The Music Hub Home screen displays. – Payment information: Allows you to set up your payment
method. Touch Add card to enter your payment information.
– Help: Display help information for Music Hub.
Music 116
Making a Purchase
Note: You have to be signed in to use some options. To sign in,
touch Sign in and use the keyboard to enter your Email You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks.
address and Music Hub Password. Touch Sign in. Touch You can also build your own album from various tracks.
Create account to set up a new account. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
➔ Music Hub.
4. Touch Search and use the keyboard to enter a key 2. Touch an album or a track.
word or phrase to search for tracks, albums, or artists. 3. Touch next to an album to add the album to your
Touch on the keyboard to search Music Hub. basket or next to each track that you want to add to
Touch the Tracks, Artists, and Albums tabs to view the your basket.
results. Touch an item to play a sample, add an item to 4. Touch next to an album to add the album to your
your basket, or add an item to your album. album or next to each track that you want to add to
your album. Touch New to create a new album.
117
Section 8: Photos and Video
This section explains how to use your device’s built-in 2. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your photo
camera and camcorder, the Video Player app to view and by aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings,
manage videos, and the Gallery app to view, capture, and see “Camera Settings” on page 119.
manage photos and videos. It also contains an overview of 3. To take the photo, touch the Camera button.
the Photo Editor, Media Hub, and Movie Studio apps.
4. Touch Back to leave the Camera and display the
Camera previous screen.
Use your device’s built-in camera and camcorder to take
photos and record videos. Settings GPS Storage
Shortcuts Active Indicator
Tip: A shortcut to Camera appears on the main Home screen
by default. Mode
From the Home screen, touch Camera.

– or –
Camera
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Camera.
The Camera screen displays.
Image
Taking Photos Viewer
To take a photo:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Camera. Settings
Photos and Video 118

To customize these shortcuts:
Important! Do not take photos of people without their
1. Touch Settings ➔ Edit shortcuts.
permission.
– or –
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed. Touch and hold any of the shortcut icons to edit them.
Do not take photos in places where you may 2. Touch and hold a setting, then drag and drop it on one
interfere with another person’s privacy. of the five settings shortcuts to the left. The replaced
setting shortcut displays in the edit list.
Camera Settings
Configuring Camera Settings
Before you start taking photos, use the camera settings to
To configure Camera settings:
configure the camera for best results. Camera settings are
represented by icons on the left side of the screen. While in Camera mode, touch a settings shortcut or
Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts touch Settings to configure the following camera
The first five icons are actually shortcuts to camera settings. settings:
These five shortcuts can be customized to fit your • Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more
preference. information, refer to “Editing Camera Settings
Flash, Self-portrait, Shooting mode, Shortcuts” on page 119.
Timer, and Exposure value are default settings • Self-portrait: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens
shortcuts. and take a photo of yourself.
• Flash: Choose a flash mode from Off, On, or Auto flash. Off is
the default.
119
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before taking a photo.
Warning! If the battery is low, the flash is not available. For
Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.
more information, refer to “Charging the Battery” on
page 7. • Effects: Apply an effect to photos. Options are: None, Negative,
Black and white, or Sepia.
• Shooting mode: Choose an automatic shooting mode, from: • Resolution: Set a size for the image. Options are: 3.2M
– Single shot: Take a single photo. (2048x1536) or 0.8M (1024x768).
– Smile shot: Touch the Camera button to automatically focus on • White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,
the subject’s face and take the photo. Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
– Panorama: Touch the Camera button to take a photo, then use • Metering: Set how the camera measures or meters the light
the on-screen guideline to move the viewfinder and take the source: Center-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.
next 7 shots automatically. • Outdoor visibility: When taking outdoor shots in bright
– Action shot: Detects action and creates a panorama of the settings, enabling Outdoor visibility Illuminates your screen to
moving object. make it easier to see what you are shooting.
• Scene mode: Choose an automatic scene mode from None,
Note: What you see on screen will not correspond to the
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Sunset, Dawn, Text, or
luminance of the actual photograph taken.
Candlelight.
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from • Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in photo
-2.0 to +2.0. composition.
• Focus mode: Set the focus mode to Auto focus or Macro. • GPS tag: Enable or disable tagging of photos with your GPS
location. displays on the screen when this option is active.

6. Touch Share via to use AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct,
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a
Picasa, Photo editor, Google+, Bluetooth, Social Hub,
photo when posting your photos on the internet.
Email, or Gmail to share the photo.
• Reset: Set all Camera settings to the defaults. 7. To delete the photo being displayed, touch Delete
and then touch Delete to delete the photo or Cancel to
Viewing Photos with the Image Viewer
exit.
After taking a photo, use the Image Viewer to view, share,
8. Touch Slideshow to display a slide show of the
delete, or edit photos.
available pictures and videos.
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the photo.
9. Touch Menu to select Set picture as to assign the
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer
photo as a Contact photo, Home and lock screens,
options.
Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.
3. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the
For more information, refer to “Viewing Photos and
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more
Videos” on page 128.
information, refer to “Pinch” on page 24.
4. Sweep across the screen to display the next or Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as
previous photo. The current photo is outlined in the jpg files. For more information, refer to “My Files” on
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a page 162.
thumbnail to view the photo it represents.
5. Touch Select device to use AllShare to stream 10. Press Back to return to the Camera to take more
photos to another device. For more information, refer to photos.
“AllShare” on page 148.
121
Camcorder Recording Videos
Use your device’s built-in Camcorder to record high- 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Camera.
definition video in 720p resolution. 2. Slide the Mode button to the Camcorder
1. From the Home screen, touch Camera. setting.
2. Slide the Mode button to the Camcorder 3. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your shot
setting. by aiming the lens at the subject. To configure settings,
The Camcorder screen displays. see “Camcorder Settings” on page 123.
4. To start recording, touch Record.
Settings Current or Storage
Shortcuts Elapsed Time Indicator During recording, the Record button flashes.
5. Touch Record to stop recording.
Mode 6. Touch Back to leave the Camcorder and display
the previous screen.
Record Important! Do not take videos of people without their

permission.
Do not take videos in places where cameras are
Image not allowed.
Viewer Do not take videos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Settings File Size Available Storage

Camcorder Settings • Self-recording: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera
Before you start taking videos, use the camcorder settings to lens and record a video of yourself.
configure the camcorder for best results. Camcorder settings • Flash: Touch Off or On to disable or enable the flash.
are represented by icons on the left side of the screen. • Recording mode: Set a recording mode. Options are: Normal
Editing Camcorder Settings Shortcuts and Limit for email, which limits the size of the video to 50
As with the camera, the first five icons are actually shortcuts megabytes.
to camcorder settings. These five shortcuts can be • Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from
customized to fit your preference.
-2.0 to +2.0.
Flash, Self-recording, Recording mode,
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before recording a
Timer, and Exposure value are default settings video. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.
shortcuts.
• Effects: Apply an effect to videos. Options are: None, Negative,
To customize these shortcuts, see “Editing Camera Settings Black and white, or Sepia.
• Resolution: Set a size for the video. Options are: 1280x720 or
Configuring Camcorder Settings
640x480.
To configure Camcorder settings:
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,
While in Camcorder mode, touch a settings shortcut or
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
touch Settings to configure the following
• Outdoor visibility: When recording outdoors in bright settings,
Camcorder settings:
enabling Outdoor visibility Illuminates your screen to make it
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more
easier to see what you are recording.
information, refer to “Editing Camera Settings
123
5. Touch Share via to use AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct,
Note: What you see on screen will not correspond to the
Google+, Bluetooth, Social Hub, YouTube, Email, or
luminance of the actual video taken.
Gmail to share the video.
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in video 6. To delete the video being displayed, touch Delete
composition. and then touch Delete to delete the video or Cancel to
• Reset: Set all Camera settings to the defaults. exit.
7. Touch Slideshow to display a slide show of the
Viewing Videos with the Image Viewer
available pictures and videos.
After recording a video, use the Image Viewer to play, share,
or delete your video. Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the video. mp4 files. For more information, refer to “My Files” on
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer page 162.
options.
3. Sweep across the screen to display the next or 8. To play a video, touch Play. Touch Pause to
previous video. The current video is outlined in the pause the video and touch Resume to resume
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a playing the video.
thumbnail to view the video it represents. 9. Touch SoundAlive to set the sound quality to
4. Touch Select device to use AllShare to stream Normal, Voice, Movie, or 5.1 ch.
videos to another device. For more information, refer to
“AllShare” on page 148.

10. Touch and drag the white dot on the progress 4. While viewing the list, touch Menu for options:
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left • List by: Display videos by Name (default), Date, Size, or Type.
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the • Share via: Share the video with Wi-Fi Direct, Google+,
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback. Bluetooth, YouTube, Email, or Gmail.
– or – • Delete: Touch videos to select them for deletion or touch
Touch Rewind to restart the video or Select all to delete all videos. Touch Delete to deleted the
Fast Forward to end the video. selected videos.
11. Press Back to return to the Camcorder. • Auto play next: Touch to enable or disable automatic playing of
Video Player videos in the order they appear.
5. Touch a video to play it. While playing a video, touch
Your device’s 8.9-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD screen
the screen to display or hide on-screen playback
provides playback of videos. Use Video player to view and
manage videos stored on your tablet. controls.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 6. Touch the icon in the upper left corner of the display
➔ Video Player. screen while the video is playing to change the Display
2. Touch the Thumbnails, List, or Folders tab. Mode from original size to full screen in ratio or full
3. Touch Search and use the keyboard to enter a screen.
• Original Size ( ): Changes the display mode to the original
search term. The current folder is searched and results
size.
are displayed. Touch X to remove the search field.
125
• Full-Screen in Ratio View ( ): Changes the display mode • Via Bluetooth: Turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth services.
to the full-screen in ratio option. The video is enlarged as much • Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a
as possible without becoming distorted. thumbnail and time are displayed for each bookmark. Touch
• Full-Screen View ( ): Changes the display mode to full to remove a bookmark.
screen. That is, the entire screen is used, which may cause • Settings: Touch this option to view the following:
some minor distortion. – Play speed: Touch and drag the slider to decrease or increase
7. Touch SoundAlive to set the sound quality to play speed.
Normal, Voice, Movie, or 5.1 ch. – Subtitles: View subtitles for the video, if available.
8. Touch Select device to use AllShare to stream – Auto play next: Enable or disable auto play of the next video.
videos to another device. For more information, refer to – Color tone: Set the color tone to Normal, Warm, or Cold.
“AllShare” on page 148. – Outdoor visibility: Turn outdoor visibility On or Off.
9. While the video is playing, touch Bookmark to • Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size,
mark your favorite areas of the video. A yellow mark
Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.
displays on the progress bar.
For more information, refer to “Playing Videos” on page 130.
10. During playback, press Menu for options:
• Share via: Send the video by Wi-Fi Direct, Google+, Bluetooth,
Social Hub, YouTube, Email, or Gmail.
• Trim: Trim the original video or trim the video and create a new
video.

Gallery • Make available offline: In addition to playing the videos that
Your device’s 8.9-inch-inch 1280x800 WXGA PLS TFT LCD screen you add to your online library, you can play videos stored on
provides a high-resolution display of photos and videos. your device’s internal storage. Then you can view videos when
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos. you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some of your
online videos available offline.
Selecting Photos and Videos to View
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gallery. Note: Making videos available offline is very similar to making
All albums display. music available offline. For more information, refer to
2. Touch Albums to display other ways to group your “Making Online Music Available Offline” on page 109.
photos and videos. Options are:
• Albums: Based on the folder in which they are stored. Viewing Groups of Photos and Videos
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gallery.
• Locations: Based on where taken.
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it.
• Time: Based on the time taken.
Thumbnails for each photo and video in the group
• Tags: Based on tags applied.
display.
3. Touch Camera to launch the Camera app.
4. Touch Menu to display the following options: 3. Touch Slideshow to view a slideshow of the
• Select album / Select group: Touch one or more albums or available pictures and videos.
groups that you want to share, stream to another device, or 4. Touch Menu for these options:
delete. • Select item: Touch one or more items that you want to share,
stream to another device, or delete.
• Group by: Further group this group by Location, Time, or Tags,
depending on the way you chose the group.
127
Viewing Photos and Videos 8. Touch Delete to delete the photo or video being
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gallery. displayed. Touch OK to delete the photo or video or
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then Cancel to exit.
touch a photo or video thumbnail. 9. Touch Slideshow to view a slideshow of photos
3. Touch the screen to show or hide Gallery options. and video thumbnails in the category. Touch the screen
4. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the to stop the slideshow and view the photo or video
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more being displayed.
information, refer to “Pinch” on page 24. 10. Touch Menu to display the following options for
5. Sweep across the screen to display the next or photos:
previous photo or video. (Videos are indicated by the • Copy to clipboard: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.
Play button.) The current photo or video is • Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Touch and drag the crop
outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. box or the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop
Touch a thumbnail to view the photo or video it area, then touch Done. Touch X to stop without cropping the
represents. photo.
6. Touch Select device to use AllShare to stream • Rotate left: Allows you to rotate the photo counterclockwise 90
photos or videos to another device. For more degrees.
information, refer to “AllShare” on page 148. • Rotate right: Allows you to rotate the photo clockwise 90
7. Touch Share to use AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct, Picasa degrees.
(photos), Photo editor (photos), Google+, Bluetooth, • Set picture as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Lock
Social Hub, YouTube (videos), Email, or Gmail to share Screen, or Wallpaper.
the photo or video. • Print: Print the current photo to a Samsung printer.

• Edit: Use Photo editor or Photo studio to edit photos. There is only two options for videos that are not
• Motion: Display the Motion settings. For more information, playing:
refer to “Motion” on page 203. • Rename: Enter an new file name.
• Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the • Details: Provides details about the video such as Title, Time,
photo. A Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in Duration, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close to close the
the Camera settings. Touch this option to open the Map app pop-up.
and display the Location where the photo was taken. For more For menu options while a video is playing and other
information, refer to “Camera Settings” on page 119. video options, see “Video Player” on page 125.
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a

Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as
photo when posting your photos on the internet. mp4 files. For more information, refer to “My Files” on
page 162.
• Rename: Enter an new file name.
• Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time, 11. Press Back to return to the category screen.
Location, Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close
to close the pop-up.
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as

jpg files. For more information, refer to “My Files” on
page 162.
129
Setting a Picture As
Tip: To change wallpaper, see “Wallpapers” on page 34.
You can use the photos you take as a contact’s photo or as
wallpaper for the Home or Lock screen:
Playing Videos
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then
touch a photo to select it.
touch a video thumbnail to play the video.
3. Touch Menu ➔ Set picture as.
4. Touch Contact photo and then touch a contact entry. Note: Videos are marked with a Play button.
– or –
3. Touch Pause to pause the video.
Touch Home and lock screens, Home screen wallpaper,
or Lock screen wallpaper. 4. Touch Resume to resume playing the video.
5. Touch and drag the white dot on the progress
The Crop picture screen displays.
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left
5. Touch and drag the crop box or the sides or corners of end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the
the crop box to create the crop area, then touch Done right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.
to save the cropped photo as the contact’s icon or – or –
wallpaper. Touch Cancel to stop without cropping the
Touch Rewind to restart the video or
photo.
Fast Forward to end the video.
Tip: To remove a contact photo, see “Updating Contacts” on
page 56.

Sharing Photos and Videos Photo Editor
Share photos and videos with your friends. The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gallery. for photos that you take on your device. Along with basic
2. Touch a category and then a group to display image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color, it also
thumbnails. provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the photo.
3. Touch Menu ➔ Select item.
➔ Photo editor.
4. Touch one or more photos and videos to highlight them
2. Touch Select picture to edit a photo in your Gallery.
for sharing.
– or –
5. Touch Share.
Touch Take picture to take a photo with the camera.
6. In the # selected drop-down, touch Select all to highlight
all photos and videos or touch Deselect all to 3. Touch the photo to load it into the Photo editor.
unhighlight all photos and videos. 4. Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your
7. Touch AllShare, Wi-Fi Direct, Picasa (photos only), photo:
Photo Editor (photos only), Google+, Bluetooth, Selection: Touch the selection icon and then
Social Hub, YouTube (videos only), Email, or Gmail then touch Magnetic, Lasso, Brush, Round, or
follow the prompts. Square to set how to mark an area for cropping,
rotating, and so on. Touch to select a
single area, to add to a selected area, or
to remove part of a selected area.
131
Selection Size: Set the size of the Grab selection Effects: Add various effects to your photo, such
area. Drag the slider from small to large. as Blur, Motion, Distortion, Filter, or Frames.
Inverse: Select the entire picture except for the Tools: Copy and Paste to another image or to
selected area. the original image. You can use the Spot
Undo: Remove the last change. healing option.
Redo: Restore a removed change. 5. When all updates to the photo have been made, touch
Save. Use the keyboard to name the edited photo
Rotate: Rotate a photo to the left or to the right and touch OK to save it.
or create a mirror image of the photo. 6. While editing a photo, touch Menu to display the
following options:
Resize: Touch and then drag the corners of the
photo to resize it. • Select picture: Open a new photo for editing.
• Take picture: Open the Camera and take a new photo.
Crop: Touch to crop (cut-out) an area of a photo.
• Share via: Send photos to another device or another person.
Options are: AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+,
Color: Set the Auto adjustment, Exposure,
Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Saturation, Contrast, Brightness, and Hue of a
photo. You can also make it Grey-scale or add • Set as: Use this photo as a Contact photo, a Home and lock
a Temperature effect. screens, Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper
image.

Media Hub 4. Browse content using these options:
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie • What’s new: Recently-added titles for rent or purchase.
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your • Movies: Movies you can rent or purchase.
fingertips, entertaining on the go has never been easier. You • TV Shows: TV shows you can rent or purchase.
can rent or purchase your favorite content and conveniently • My Media: Content you have previously purchased or rented.
watch anywhere. Featuring the stunning viewing quality
5. When you find media you want to view, use these
Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway
options:
to mobile video like you have never experienced it before.
• View trailer: View a short clip from the movie or show.
Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and • Buy: Purchase the media for unlimited viewing on your device.
depends on service availability. Follow the prompts to enter payment details.
• Rent: Purchase a time-limited download of the media. Follow
the prompts to enter payment details.
➔ Media Hub.
6. For additional information about Media Hub, touch
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA), touch
Menu ➔ Help.
I agree to the Terms and Conditions, and then touch
Accept to continue or Decline to exit. Media Hub Notices
• Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
The Media Hub screen displays.
you create an account in Media Hub.
3. To rent or buy media, you must have a Samsung
• Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on
account. Touch Menu ➔ My Profile to sign in to
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to
your Samsung account or to create an account. Follow
the same account.
the prompts to complete log-in.
133
• You may choose to remove a device from your account no more • You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as
than once every 90 days. a) license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
• You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as Media Content has been buffered.
you like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media • You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download consecutive hours of start of playback.
availability and studio permissions. – Stopping, pausing, or restarting rented Media Content does not
• You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you extend the available viewing time.
have acquired through the Service. – In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
• You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
Media Content.
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
• Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
viewable on only 1 device in your account. Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
• Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card. (24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
• Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
where there is a weak signal. • You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
through any output on your mobile device, including All Share.

Movie Studio The Movie Project screen displays.
Use Movie Studio to edit the videos you take with the
camcorder or copy onto your tablet into movies. You can cut
and order scenes, add a sound track, and so on.
➔ Movie Studio.
Adding a New Movie Project
To use Movie Studio to work with videos, add a new project:
➔ Movie Studio.
2. Touch New project.
The Project name pop-up displays. 3. To add video clips or photos to your project, touch
ADD and then touch one of the following:
3. Use the keyboard to enter a project name and touch
• Record a video: Use the Camcorder to record a new video
OK.
segment.
Updating a Movie Project • Take a photo: Use the Camera to take a new photo.
There are several ways to add videos, photos, and sound to • Import video clip: Add an existing video.
your movie project.
• Import image: Add an existing photo.
• Import music: Add music to your project. Alternately, touch
➔ Movie Studio.
at the bottom of the screen to add music to your project.
2. Add a new project or touch an existing movie project.
135
4. Touch Menu to display the following options: 8. Touch a segment and then touch Menu to display
• Change aspect ratio: Choose an aspect ratio. The aspect ratio the following options:
of each segment in the project is listed. • Change rendering mode: Choices are Black borders, Stretch
• Change project name: Use the keyboard to change the name to fit, and Crop.
of the current movie project. • Remove: Touch Yes to delete the selected segment.
• Export movie: Set the movie size and quality, and save the 9. Touch a segment
updated movie. Deleting a Movie Project
• Delete project: Delete the current movie project. To delete an existing movie project:
5. To control playback of your project, touch one of the 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
following ➔ Movie Studio.
• Play to play the video. 2. Sweep across the screen to locate the project you want
• Pause to pause the video. to delete.
• Previous segment to go back one segment. 3. Touch and hold the project thumbnail.
• Next segment to go forward one segment. 4. Touch Delete project and then touch Yes.
• Rewind to back up to the start of the project segments.
6. Touch and drag the Workspace control to expand
or contract the workspace.
7. Touch a segment to add effects, add a title, and select
a transition for the beginning or end of the segment.

Section 9: Connections
Your device includes features to connect to the internet and Finding Wi-Fi Networks
to other devices by using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or a USB cable. You can have your device automatically notify you of
Wi-Fi available networks. For more information, refer to “Advanced
Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides Settings” on page 177.
access to local area networks. Use your device’s Wi-Fi Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
feature to: Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn
• Access the internet for browsing or to send and receive email. Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically searches for
• Access your corporate network. available, in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
• Use hotspots provided by hotels or airports while traveling. Turning Wi-Fi On
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wireless 1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.
Access Point (WAP). WAPs can be Open (unsecured, as with The Status Details displays.
most hotspots) or Secured (requiring you to provide login 2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On.
Turning Wi-Fi Off
credentials). Your device supports the 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi
protocol.
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.
Configuring Wi-Fi Settings
The Status Details displays.
For more information about configuring your device’s Wi-Fi
settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 176. 2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi Off.
137
Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,
When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available additional network information may be required, such as
Wi-Fi connections, then displays them on screen. a Password.
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.
The Status Details displays. • Password: If the WAP is secured, enter the password or hex
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Your device automatically key.
scans for available Wireless Access Points. 4. Touch Save to save the settings.
3. When the scan is complete, touch a Wi-Fi network to Wi-Fi Direct
connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, your device Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
automatically connects. If the Wi-Fi network is transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
secured, enter the password at the prompt to connect. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually ➔ More ... ➔ Wi-Fi Direct.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 2. Touch the OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi Direct
➔ Settings. on.
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the If you are currently connected to a Wi-Fi network, a
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on. prompt displays Start Wi-Fi Direct operation. This will
3. Touch Add network, then enter network information: turn off Wi-Fi client/hotspot operation.
• Network SSID: Enter the name of the Wi-Fi Wireless Access 3. Touch OK to continue.
Point (WAP). Your device will begin to search for other devices
• Security: Select the type of security used by the WAP. enabled with Wi-Fi direct connections.
Connections 138
4. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices. 2. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct option.
5. Enable Wi-Fi Direct (similar to Steps 1 and 2) on the The Wi-Fi Direct settings screen displays, Wi-Fi Direct
device to which you want to connect. is turned on, and your device scans for other devices.
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed, 3. Touch a connected device name. For example,
touch on it. Android_XXXX.
An Invitation to connect displays on the device to which 4. The other device displays a pop-up that indicates it is
you want to connect. receiving the file.
7. On that device, touch Accept. The file is transferred and can be found in My files in
You have 2 minutes to touch Accept on the device to the ShareViaWifi folder.
which you want to connect for the connection to be
made. Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
shared folder information may differ.
Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the Bluetooth
icon will display at the bottom of your screen.
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications
Sharing Information with Connected Device technology for exchanging information over a distance of
To share videos, photos, or other information with the about 30 feet.
connected device, follow these steps: You do not need to line up the devices to send information
1. View the information that you want to share. For with Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you can exchange
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in information between them, even if they are in different
your camera viewer or My files folder, then touch the rooms.
Share, Share via, or Send via option.
139
Configuring Bluetooth Settings 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Configure your device’s Bluetooth settings. For more ➔ Settings.
information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 178. 2. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the OFF / ON icon
Turning Bluetooth On or Off to turn Bluetooth on.
To turn Bluetooth on or off: 3. Enable the target device’s discoverable or visible
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps mode.
➔ Settings. 4. Touch the Bluetooth tab and then touch Scan for
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Bluetooth tab, devices. Touch Stop at any time to stop scanning.
touch the OFF / ON icon to turn Bluetooth on or 5. From the list of found devices, touch the target device,
off. then follow the prompts to complete the pairing:
• If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target
Note: When Bluetooth is on, the Bluetooth icon displays in device and touch OK. When prompted, enter the PIN on the
the Status Bar. target device.
• If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device
Pairing with a Bluetooth Device
attempts to pair with the device automatically. Follow the
Search for a Bluetooth device and pair with it, to exchange prompts on your device and the target device to complete the
information between your device and the target device.
pairing.
Tip: After pairing, your device and the target device recognize
each other and exchange information without having to
enter a passcode or PIN.
Connections 140
Sharing Data with a Bluetooth Device Receiving Data from a Bluetooth Device
To send data to a Bluetooth device: To receive data from a Bluetooth device:
1. Select a file or item from an appropriate application. 1. Turn Bluetooth on. For more information, refer to
2. Select an option for sharing data with the Bluetooth “Turning Bluetooth On or Off” on page 140.
feature.
Note: To select the length of time that your device will be
Note: The method for selecting an option may vary by data visible, select Menu ➔ Visible time-out.
type.
2. Pair with the Bluetooth device from which you want to
3. Search for and pair with a Bluetooth device. For more receive data. For more information, refer to “Pairing
information, refer to “Pairing with a Bluetooth Device” with a Bluetooth Device” on page 140.
on page 140. A Bluetooth authorization request pop-up displays
when a Bluetooth device sends data to your device.
3. Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive
data.
A File received message displays.
Received data is saved to the Bluetooth folder. If you receive
a contact, it is saved to your contacts automatically.
141
Managing Downloads Uninstalling an App
Files, apps, and other items you download in Internet, Gmail, Apps come pre-installed on your device and you can
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal download additional apps from Google Play. If you decide to,
storage. You can use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or you can uninstall apps you downloaded from Google Play and
delete what you have downloaded. other sources.
To manage the demands on their networks or to help you There are several ways to uninstall an app:
avoid unexpected charges, some mobile networks place 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
restrictions on the size of the files you can download. When ➔ Applications.
you are connected to such networks, and you try to 2. Touch the Downloaded tab.
download an oversized-file, you are asked or required to
3. Touch the app you want to uninstall.
delay downloading the file until the next time you are
connected to a Wi-Fi network. At that time, the download 4. Touch the Uninstall button.
resumes automatically. The Downloads app can also be used A pop-up displays the message This application will be
to view and manage these queued files. uninstalled.
Downloaded files are stored in the Download directory in 5. Touch OK to confirm you want to uninstall the app.
your tablet’s internal storage. You can view and copy files
You can also use Google Play to uninstall apps you
from this directory when connected to a computer with a
downloaded from there (see “Play Store” on page 166).
USB cable.
Connections 142
To uninstall an app from the Apps screen: To learn more about Samsung Kies and Samsung
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps. applications, browse featured applications and download
2. Touch Menu ➔ Downloaded applications. Kies at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/downloads.
The Downloaded applications screen displays. Note: Samsung Kies works on both PC and Macintosh
3. Touch Menu ➔ Uninstall. computers.
A appears on Apps that can be uninstalled.
Connecting With Samsung Kies
4. Touch an app’s icon and then touch OK to uninstall and
1. Install Samsung Kies software on your PC.
remove the app from your tablet.
Warning! Close any running applications before connecting
Note: You cannot uninstall the apps that are included with
your device to a PC.
Android. You can only uninstall the apps you have
downloaded.
2. Run Samsung Kies.
Kies Via Wi-Fi 3. From a Home screen, touch Apps

➔ Settings.
Samsung Kies is a software that enables you to update your
4. Touch More ... ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi.
device firmware, synchronize files, and transfer data to and
from your device directly by connecting to the PC. Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.
5. Follow the prompts from Kies to update your device
Note: Some features will be supported through the System
firmware.
Updates feature in the future. For more information,
refer to “Software Update” on page 206. 6. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.
143
Synchronizing with Windows Media Connecting as a Mass Storage Device
Player You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC. access the file directory.
1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable. 1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays Your computer recognizes the connection and displays
the AutoPlay screen. the AutoPlay screen.
2. Click the option to Sync digital media files to this device 2. Click the option to Open device to view files.
to synchronize music files. You should see a Tablet folder.
3. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync 3. Copy files to or from the PC from or to the device
list and begin synchronizing. (Tablet folder).
4. When finished, exit Windows Media Player and 4. When finished, close the PC folder and disconnect the
disconnect the USB cable. USB cable.
Connections 144
Section 10: Applications and Widgets
This section contains a description of each application that is GPS Applications
available on the Apps screen, its function, and how to
GPS applications allow you to achieve real-time, GPS-
navigate through that particular application. If the application
enabled, turn-by-turn navigation and to access local
is already described in another section of this user manual, searches based on a variety of category parameters.
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
Various widgets are also described.
following conditions:
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently- • inside a building or between buildings
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details, • in a tunnel or underground passage
see “App Shortcuts” on page 33. • in poor weather
• around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
Update Available
• in a vehicle with tinted windows
When you open an application that is preloaded on your
Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation, mapping, and Point of
device, an Update Available message may be displayed if
Interest content is available for three continents, including
there is a new version of the app available.
North America (U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe,
Touch Upgrade to update the app or touch Not Now to and China, where wireless coverage is available.
open the app without updating.
For more information, refer to “Updates to Downloaded
Apps” on page 166.
145
Important! If you touch or cover the internal GPS antenna
Alarm
while using GPS services, it may impede the GPS Set alarms for reminders or for wake-up times.
signal resulting in the GPS services not working in Adding and Configuring Alarms
an optimal manner. Refer to the following diagram 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Alarm.
to locate the approximate location of the internal 2. Touch Create alarm or touch an alarm that is
GPS antenna.
already set.
3. Touch fields to configure the alarm:
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi GPS Antenna • Time: Set a time for the alarm to sound. Touch + or - to change
Antenna
the hour and minute, and touch AM or PM.
• Label: Touch the field and use the keyboard to enter a name
Location of for the alarm.
Internal • Repeat: Choose days for the alarm to repeat. Alarm days are
Antennas
blue.
• Ringtone: Choose a tone for alarms.
• Vibrate: Enable or disable vibration for the alarm.
(Back view
of device) • Snooze: Enable or disable the snooze option for the alarm.
4. Touch Done to save the alarm.
The main Alarm screen displays showing the new or
updated alarm.
Applications and Widgets 146

Activating Alarms Setting the Snooze Feature
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Alarm. To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds:
2. Touch Turn alarm on to activate the alarm. A gray Touch and slide to the left. Snooze must first be
alarm means the alarm is deactivated. set in the alarm settings.
3. Touch an alarm to change any of its settings and then Alarm Settings
touch Done to save the updates.
To configure general alarm settings:
Deactivating and Deleting Alarms 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Alarm.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Alarm. 2. Touch Settings.
2. Touch and hold an alarm and then touch one of the The following options display:
following options:
• Alarm in silent mode: Enable alarms to play even if the tablet
• Delete alarm: Delete the alarm.
is in Silent mode.
• Deactivate alarm: Turn off the alarm.
• Alarm volume: Touch and drag the slider to set Alarm volume.
– or –
• Snooze duration: Set the snooze delay time to 3, 5, 10, 15, or
Touch Delete, touch the existing alarms you want
30 minutes.
to delete, and then touch Done.
• Snooze repeat: Indicate how many times to repeat the snooze
Turning Off an Alarm alarm: 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 times.
When the alarm sounds, to turn off the alarm: • Side button settings: Set what action the side buttons should
Touch and drag to the right. take during an alarm: None, Snooze, or Dismiss.
147
• Set default ringtone: Choose a ringtone to play as a default, if 3. Touch Settings to configure these settings:
the Ringtone is not defined for an alarm. Touch the button next • Media server name: Use the keyboard to enter a new media
to the ringtone you want to set and touch OK. server name, if desired (the default is your device’s default
AllShare name), then touch Save.
AllShare allows your tablet to stream photos, music, and • Share media: Allows you to restrict what is shared from your
videos from its memory to other Digital Living Network device. Touch the items you want to share and touch OK.
Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your tablet can also play • Access point network: Turn on your Wi-Fi service and
digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices. connect to an available Wi-Fi Access Point.
• Upload from other devices: Set your device’s treatment of
Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products
files copied from other devices. Choose from Always accept,
visit
http://www.dlna.org/home. Always ask, or Always reject, then touch OK.
4. Touch one of the device entries on the left of the
Configuring AllShare AllShare screen. My device lists the Videos, Photos, and
Connect to Wi-Fi, configure AllShare settings to identify your Music files on your device.
device as a server, and set treatment of copied files. 5. Touch a file to play it.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer The Select device pop-up displays. Touch the playback
to “Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network” on device.
page 138. 6. Touch and hold a file to view details about the file, such
2. From a Home screen, touch Apps as, Title, Date created, File location, and so on.
➔ AllShare .

Amazon Kindle 2. Touch store to search Amazon MP3 for Bestsellers and
TM
Use the Amazon Kindle application to download books for New Releases or to Browse By Genre.
reading, right on your device. – or –
Touch player to play your music anywhere.
Note: You must be registered with Amazon to use the Kindle
application. • Touch Cloud or Device.
• Touch Playlists, Artists, Albums, or Songs.
From a Home screen, touch Apps • Touch a playlist, an artist, an album, or a song.
➔ Amazon Kindle. • Touch store, in the upper right hand corner of the screen, to
Amazon MP3 visit the amazon MP3 store. Touch player to return to the
The Amazon MP3 app for Android includes both the Amazon music player.
MP3 store and Amazon Cloud Player. Shop for music and Calculator
play music stored on your tablet. Play or download music The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions to
stored in Amazon Cloud Drive. solve simple arithmetic problems and advanced operators to
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps solve more complex problems.
➔ Amazon MP3. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
The Amazon MP3 store and player options display the ➔ Calculator.
first time you request the Amazon MP3 app. 2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the
+ (add), - (subtract), × (multiply), or ÷ (divide) key.
149
4. Enter the next number. 1. From the Home screen, touch Calendar.
5. To view the result, touch the = (equals) key. – or –
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as many times as required. From a Home screen, touch Apps
7. Touch to clear the result. ➔ Calendar.
8. For more advanced problems, rotate your device to 2. Touch a tab to choose a calendar view:
landscape mode and use the advanced operators sin, • Year: Display all twelve months of this year. Sweep across the
ln, cos, log, tan, and so on, just as you would on a years at the bottom of the screen to display another year.
pocket calculator. • Month: Display the current month. Touch a month and year at
9. Touch and hold the Calculator’s display to copy or cut the bottom of the screen to display another month.
the contents of the display. • Week: Display the current week. Touch a week at the bottom of
Copied to clipboard displays. Paste the copied value in the screen to display another week.
another app. • Day: Display today’s schedule by hour. Touch day at the bottom
Calendar of the screen to display another day.
Your device includes a powerful Calender to help you • List: Display only event and task names and dates for a
organize your schedules more conveniently and effectively. selected year. Touch a year at the bottom of the screen to
Learn to create and manage events and tasks, and set display another year. Touch a date to hide or show the event or
alarms to remind yourself of important events and tasks. task name.
• Task: Display your list of tasks. Touch the sort field to change
Tip: A shortcut to Calendar displays on the main Home screen
how your tasks are sorted. Tasks can be sorted by due date,
by default.
priority, date, week, month, or group.

3. Swipe left or right across the screen to view other days • Go to: Use the Set date pop-up to enter a date and then touch
or other weeks. Swipe up or down the screen to view Set to display that date on your calendar.
other events. • Delete: Delete events for the year, month, week, day, week,
4. To find an event or task, touch Search. month, before today, or all events, depending on the Calendar
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a search term. view.
Possible events display as you type. • Sync: Manually synchronizes the calendar entries among all of
Touch on the keyboard to remove it. your current accounts, for example, Gmail, Exchange, and so
on.
Touch an event to send, edit, or delete the event.
• Show controls / Hide controls: Show or hide a small month
5. Touch Add event / Add task to add a new event to calendar and a list of events in landscape mode.
your calendar. For more information, refer to “Creating • Settings: Customize the calendar. For more information, refer
an Event or Task” on page 152.
to “Calendar Settings” on page 153.
6. Touch Menu for these options:
7. Touch Today to return to the current date.
• Zoom in: In the Week and Day views, increase the size of the
8. Touch Calendars to configure which events to display.
area being viewed.
Touch Add account ➔ Add account to add
• Zoom out: In the Week and Day views, decrease the size of the additional accounts from which calendar events can be
area being viewed.
synced.
151
Creating an Event or Task Managing Events
To create an event or task: You can delete, send, and edit events on your mobile device:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
➔ Calendar. ➔ Calendar.
2. Double-tap the date for which you want to enter an all 2. Touch an event.
day event or task. A pop-up displays event information.
• Touch the Add event or Add task tab.
3. Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the event.
• Touch the My calendar field and touch a calendar to which the
Touch Menu ➔ Share via and then touch Bluetooth,
even or task should be added. Email, or Wi-Fi Direct to share the event.
• Use the keyboard to enter the event or task name.
Touch Edit to update the event details.
– or –
– or –
Touch the date for which you want to enter an event or
task. Touch Options and then touch Delete,
Share via, or Edit.
• Touch .
• Touch the Add event or Add task tab.
• Enter the event or task information.
3. Touch Save.

Add Additional Calendar Accounts View settings
To add additional accounts: • First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps • Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events.
➔ Calendar ➔ Calendars ➔ Add account. • Lock time zone: Allows you to lock event times and dates
– or – based on your selected time zone, which is defined by the
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings following field.
➔ Accounts and sync. • Select time zone: If Lock time zone is enabled, used this
The Accounts and sync screen displays. option to select a time zone to lock event times and dates.
2. Touch Add account to display the Add account • Show week number: Show the week number to the left of
option. each week in the Month view.
3. Touch an account type and enter your account • Calendars: Enable calendars for your various accounts.
information. Event notification
Calendar Settings • Set alerts & notifications: Touch to select, which allows you to
To set up Calendar preferences: set the Alert, Status bar notification, or Off.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps • Select ringtone: Choose a tone for calendar notifications.
➔ Calendar. • Vibration: Enable or disable vibration mode.
2. Touch Menu ➔ Settings. • Default reminder time: Set the default time for a notification
The following options display: before an event is to occur.
• Notifications while screen is off: Enable or disable the display
of notifications on the full screen while the screen is turned off.
153
Sync settings Contacts
• Sync events/tasks: Displays the General sync settings. For Store contact information for your friends, family and
more information, refer to “Accounts and Sync” on colleagues, to quickly access information or to send a
page 189. message. For more information, refer to “Contacts” on
(Accounts): Touch an account and then touch the check page 54.
box to enable or disable the calendar sync for that From a Home screen, touch Apps
account. ➔ Contacts.
Camera Downloads
Files, apps, and other items you download in Internet, Gmail,
Take photos and record video with your device’s built in
Camera. Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal
storage. Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete
For more information, refer to “Camera” on page 118.
what you have downloaded.
Tip: A shortcut to Camera displays on the main Home screen 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
by default. ➔ Downloads.
2. Touch an item to open it.
From the Home screen, touch Camera. 3. Touch headings for earlier downloads to view them.
– or – 4. Touch items you want to send, to check them, and then
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Camera. touch Share via. Touch an option to share the item.
Options are: AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,
Google+, Photo editor, Picasa, YouTube, Social Hub, or
Wi-Fi Direct.

5. Touch items you want to delete, to check them, and eBook
then touch Delete. This application lets you access and read books on your
The items are deleted from your tablet. device.
6. Touch Sort by size or Sort by date, at the bottom of the From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ eBook.
Downloads pop-up, to switch back and forth. The eBook main screen displays.
Dual Clock Options While Reading a Book
Display the time for two different locations. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ eBook.
To add the Dual clock widget to a Home screen, see “Adding 2. Touch the cover of a book or PDF to start reading.
Widgets to a Home screen” on page 29. Once the book displays, sweep across the screen to
1. From a Home screen, locate the Dual clock widget. turn the page.
The Dual clock widget is actually two widgets. Each
3. Touch the screen to display options that can be used
widget displays the time, a city name, and the
while reading a book.
Daylight Saving Time setting, if it is set.
• There are options on the top, left that let you highlight text,
2. Touch either widget to choose a different city than the draw on the page, erase drawings, and configure the pen and
one currently displayed. highlighting.
• There are options on the top, right that let you set the font and
theme, set the speed and pitch of text-to-speech, search the
book, and bookmark pages in the book.
155
4. Touch and hold a word in a book to display the
Note: For Bookmarks, Highlights, Memos, and Drawings,
following options: Copy, Highlight, Memo, and Search.
touch Delete and then touch entries or Select all to
Touch and drag either tab to select more or less
delete entries.
text. Select Memo and use the keyboard to create a
memo about the selected text. 6. Touch Back to return to the eBook main screen.
5. While reading a book or PDF, touch Menu for these
Managing Your Books
options:
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ eBook.
• Table of contents: Displays a table of contents for the book.
2. In the Application bar, on the upper left of the eBook
Touch an entry to display that page in the book.
main screen, touch All to display all books and PDFs,
• Bookmarks: Displays bookmarked pages. Touch an entry to
Book to display only books, and PDF to display only
display that page in the book.
PDFs.
• Highlights: Displays pages on which highlights have been
3. To find a book by title or author name, touch
made.
Search, use the keyboard to enter a key word or phrase
• Memos: Displays pages on which memos have been created to search for, and touch Go on the keyboard to search.
and the memo text.
4. Touch List to view your books in a list mode. Then
• Drawings: Displays pages on which drawings have been touch Recent, Title, Authors, or Categories to view your
made. books in a different way.
• Information: Displays various information about the book,
such as author, format, size, and download date.

5. To add more books to your library, touch Shop. Gmail
A pop-up displays several book sellers and their Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based
internet webpage addresses. Touch a link to shop for email. For more information, refer to “Gmail” on page 64.
more books, touch Add store to add a new webpage, or From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gmail.
touch Delete to delete one or more of the existing
Google+
webpage entries.
Share updates and see what is going on around you with
6. Touch Menu for these options: Google+ for mobile.
• Edit: Touch to select books to be deleted and then touch
For more information, refer to “Google+” on page 81.
Done.
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Google+.
• Import: Add books from My files.
• Accounts: To read books, create or sign in to an Adobe
Internet
account, which allows you to open copyright protected books. Your device includes a full HTML browser, to access the
internet.
Email
For more information, refer to “Internet” on page 81.
Send and receive email using popular email services.
For more information, refer to “Email” on page 68. Tip: A shortcut to Internet displays on the main Home screen
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Email. by default.
Gallery From the Home screen, touch Internet.

Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos. – or –
For more information, refer to “Gallery” on page 127. From a Home screen, touch Apps
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Gallery. ➔ Internet.
157
Latitude From the Home screen, touch Maps.
Use Google Latitude to locate your friends on a map and – or –
share or hide your location. For more information, refer to From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Maps.
“Latitude” on page 90.
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Latitude. Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some
features require Standalone or Google location services.
Local For more information, refer to “Location Services” on
Google Local uses your location to help you find nearby page 191.
destinations, such as restaurants, bars, hotels, attractions,
ATMs and gas stations, or you can enter a location. Media Hub
For more information, refer to “Local” on page 91. Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Local. and TV content.
Maps For more information, refer to “Media Hub” on page 133.
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,
Note: Media Hub service requires the Samsung Account app
and other location-based information. For more information,
and depends on service availability.
refer to “Maps” on page 92.
Tip: A shortcut to Maps displays on the main Home screen by From a Home screen, touch Apps
default. ➔ Media Hub.

Memo • Print: Select one or all memos, touch Print, and send the
Create and manage text memos and use Bluetooth to send memos to a Samsung printer.
memos to paired Bluetooth devices. • Sync memo: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up
Composing a Memo your memos.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Memo. • PIN lock: Set a PIN number to use to lock your memos.
2. Touch New memo, compose the memo, then touch • Font size: Set the text font size. Options are: Tiny, Small,
Done to save. Normal, Large, and Huge.
For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 42. 4. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to
display the following options:
Memo List Options
• Delete: Delete the selected memo.
While viewing the list of Memos:
• Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN number to
1. Touch List to view your memos in a list mode.
remove the lock form the memo. Once you lock a memo, you
Touch an entry in the list on the left to view the memo
have to use your PIN number to view the memo.
on the right of the screen.
• Share via: Touch Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to
2. To delete one or more memos, touch Delete, select
send the memo by the selected method. For more information,
one or all memos, and touch Delete.
refer to “Bluetooth” on page 139.
3. Touch Menu for the following options:
• Update SNS: Lets you post the memo to one or more of your
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date, Title, or
social network sites. Only sites you are signed in to are
Color.
displayed.
• Share via: Select one or all memos, touch Share, and then
touch Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Wi-Fi Direct to send
memos to another device or another person.
159
Memo Options Messenger
While viewing a Memo: With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends
Touch Memo options for the following options: together into a simple group conversation.
For more information, refer to “Messenger” on page 80.
Delete: Delete this Memo.
➔ Messenger.
Color: Choose a color for this memo.
Movie Studio
Lock/Unlock: Lock the memo or use your PIN Use Movie Studio to edit the videos you take with the
number to remove the lock form the memo. Once camcorder or copy onto your tablet into movies. You can cut
you lock a memo, you have to use your PIN and order scenes, add a sound track, and so on.
number to view the memo. For more information, refer to “Movie Studio” on page 135.
Print: Send this memo to a Samsung printer.
➔ Movie Studio.
Update SNS: Lets you post the memo to one or

more of your social network sites. Only sites you
are signed in to are displayed.
Share via: Touch Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or

Wi-Fi Direct to send the memo by the selected
method. For more information, refer to
“Bluetooth” on page 139.

Moviefone • Trailers: Displays a list of video clips that show selected scenes
Movie lovers can experience the fun and convenience of from current and upcoming movies. Touch an entry to play the
Moviefone on their Galaxy Tab. With Moviefone mobile apps trailer.
and a custom mobile web experience, you are mere taps • News: Displays a list of articles about movies, actors, and
away from on-the-go movie planning. Browse a directory of actresses from the past and present.
movies, check the latest theater showtimes, find theater 3. While viewing one of the options, touch Menu (at
locations nearest to you, buy tickets in advance, view original
the bottom left of the screen) for these options:
movie content and news, and read movie reviews. With
• Sort Movie: Sort the list of movies By Release Date, By MPAA
Moviefone and your Galaxy Tab, you have movies at your
Rating, or Alphabetically.
fingertips.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ • Search: Enter a movie you want to find.
Moviefone. • Edit Location: Use your current location or use another location
2. Touch one of the following option tabs: based on a ZIP code.
• Movies: Displays a list of movies playing in your area. Touch an • Settings: Allows you to log in to Facebook.
entry to get more information about the movie. • About: Lists information about Moviefone including the license
• Upcoming: Displays a list of movies that will be coming soon, agreement.
their release dates, and rating. Touch an entry to get more Music Hub
information about the movie. The Music Hub lets you purchase and download songs and
• Theaters: Displays a list of theaters located near to your albums.
present location. Touch an entry to get more information about For more information, refer to “Music Hub” on page 116.
the theater including a list of movies offered there and From a Home screen, touch Apps
showtimes for today. ➔ Music Hub.
161
Music Player 3. Touch a file to launch it in the associated application, if
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. the file is associated with an application.
For more information, refer to “Viewing Your Music Library” 4. While browsing files, use these controls:
on page 110. Up: Display a higher directory.
➔ Music Player. Search: Use the keyboard to enter a search term.
My Files The current folder is searched and results are
displayed. Touch X to remove the search field.
Find, view, and manage folders and files, such as music files,
photo files, video files, and so on, stored on your tablet. If the Display mode: Enable or disable thumbnails for
file is associated with an application on your device, you can each file.
launch the file in the application.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Root: Display the root directory.
➔ My Files.
2. Touch a folder and scroll down or up until you locate a Add Folder: Add a new folder in the current folder.
file.
Mark files: Touch the box to the left of each file or
Note: You may have to touch one or more subfolders before next to the folder to select all files in the folder.
you encounter files. Then touch send, copy, cut, or delete in the
Application bar.

5. To view a photo file: Composing a Pen Memo
• Touch the file. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
The Gallery app is used to open the photo. ➔ Pen memo.
For more information, refer to “Viewing Photos and Videos” 2. Touch New pen memo.
on page 128.
3. Touch the Enter title field and use the keyboard to enter
6. To view a video file:
a title for the memo.
• Touch the file.
4. Touch the body of the memo and then touch:
The Video player is launched and plays the video.
Type the memo.
For more information, refer to “Video Player” on page 125.
Navigation Write or draw with your finger or a stylus.
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and get walking
or driving directions. For more information, refer to Erase writing or drawing.
“Navigation” on page 96.
Set Brush, Color, Pen size, Eraser size, and
From a Home screen, touch Apps Theme.
➔ Navigation.
Undo the last writing or drawing.
Pen Memo
Create and manage memos that you create by typing text or Redo the last writing or drawing.
writing with your finger or a stylus. You can even draw and
save pictures as a memo. You can also share your memos.
5. Touch Done to save.
For more information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 42.
163
Pen Memo List Options • Sync memo: Sign in to Google and use Google docs to back up
While viewing the list of Memos: your memos.
1. To find a memo, touch Search, use the keyboard to • Auto tag settings: Touch Enable auto tag to enable auto
enter a key word or phrase to search for, and touch tagging of your memos.
on the keyboard to search. 5. Touch and hold a memo thumbnail or list entry to
2. Touch List to view your memos in a list mode. display the following options:
Touch an entry in the list on the left to view the memo • Delete: Delete the selected memo.
on the right of the screen. • Export: Touch To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text), select
3. To delete one or more memos, touch Delete, select one or all memos, and touch Export.
one or all memos, and touch Delete. • Share via: Touch AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,
4. Touch Menu for the following options: Google+, Photo editor, Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct to
• Sort by: Set whether to sort the memo list by Date, Title, Text send memos to another device or another person. For more
first, Drawing first, or Auto tag first. information, refer to “Bluetooth” on page 139.
• Share via: Select one or all memos, touch Share, and then Memo Options
touch AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Google+, While viewing a Memo:
Photo editor, Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct to send 1. Touch Delete to delete this memo.
memos to another device or another person. 2. Touch Menu for the following options:
• Export: Touch To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text), select • Share via: Touch AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,
one or all memos, and touch Export. Google+, Photo editor, Picasa, Social Hub, or Wi-Fi Direct to
• Print: Select one or all memos, touch Print, and send the send memos to another device or another person.
memos to a Samsung printer.

• Export: Touch To Gallery (drawings) or To Memo (text) to Play Books
export the memo to the selected app. Google eBooks is a new way to discover, buy, and enjoy your
• Print: Send the memo to a Samsung printer. favorite books online and offline.
• Set as: Use this memo as a Contact photo, Home and lock For more information, refer to “Play Books” on page 97.
screens, Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper From a Home screen, touch Apps
image. ➔ Play Books.
3. Touch the body of the memo to edit the memo.
Play Movies
Options display for editing. For more information, refer
The Play Movies app is a new application for select Android
to “Composing a Pen Memo” on page 163. devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play™ Store
Photo Editor can be downloaded for offline viewing through this
To perfect any photos stored on your tablet, use Photo editor application. In addition, the Play Movies app can be used to
stream your Google Play™ movie rentals as well as play any
to crop, rotate, resize, adjust color and contrast, and much
of your personal videos stored on your tablet.
more.
For more information, refer to “Photo Editor” on page 131. From a Home screen, touch Apps
➔ Play Movies.
➔ Photo editor. For more information touch Menu ➔ Help.
165
Play Music • Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account, or New
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer. to create a Google account.
For more information, refer to “Play Music App” on For more information, refer to “Setting Up Your Gmail
page 102. Account” on page 64.
2. The first time you open Play Store, read the Google
Play™ Terms of Service and then touch Accept to
➔ Play Music.
continue.
Play Store 3. To browse for items to install, touch Apps, Games,
Google Play Store provides access to downloadable Music, Books, or Movies. Touch a tab, such as
applications and games to install on your device. It also
CATEGORIES, FEATURED, TOP PAID, or TOP FREE to
allows you to provide feedback and comments about an
refine your search.
application, or flag an application that might be incompatible
with your device. 4. To get help for using Google Play™, touch Menu
➔ Help.
Tip: A shortcut to Play Store displays on the main Home screen Updates to Downloaded Apps
by default.
You can check for new versions of applications by visiting the
Google Play Store. Items that have a new version available
1. From the Home screen, touch Play Store.
will say Update.
– or –
You can also select apps that you would like to be updated
From a Home screen, touch Apps automatically. To do this:
➔ Play Store. 1. From the Home screen, touch Play Store.
If you are not already logged in with your Google 2. Touch Installed Apps.
account, the Add a Google Account screen displays.
3. Touch the Installed tab to list the Play Store apps 3. Enter your Email information, if desired, and touch
installed on your device. Register to complete the process.
Update is displayed if there is an update available for – or –
the app. Touch Later to ignore this registration.
4. Touch an app and then touch Allow automatic updating The main Polaris Office screen displays. Recent Files
to enable automatic updating. displays a list of recently opened documents.
5. Touch Open to open the app on your device. 4. Touch Search to search for document files by
6. Touch Update to update the app on your device. using a text string.
Polaris Office 5. Several options are listed under Category. Touch one of
Polaris® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office the following:
compatible office suite. This application provides a central • Local Storage: Where you keep documents on this device. You
place for managing your documents online or offline. can manage documents or send them to others, and upload
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable the documents.For more information, refer to “My Files” on
Document Format) files. page 162.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps • Web Storage: Provides your online storage information at
➔ Polaris Office. Box.net. You can also share your documents to others without
2. Touch legal notice to read the Polaris privacy principles. using email attachments.
• Add Account: Once you sign up at Box.net, enter your email
address and password to add your account on this device.
167
• New File: Create a new office document. Touch the type of Readers Hub
document you want to create. Samsung Readers Hub lets you access news, books, and
• Settings: Displays the following options: magazines, all from one place. This makes using your device
File list settings as an e-reader easy and organized. Learn to use Readers
– Create back-up file: Touch the check box to enable creating a Hub for accessing various reading materials.
back-up file when you save documents.
Tip: A shortcut to Readers Hub displays on the main Home
– Display file extensions: Touch the check box to enable the screen by default.
display of file extensions.
– Clear Recent Files: Touch to clear your recently opened 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
documents list. ➔ Readers Hub.
General settings 2. Read the Disclaimer and touch Confirm to continue or
– Live update: Touch to make sure you have the latest version of Back to exit.
Polaris Office. The Readers Hub Home screen displays.
– About: Displays the Polaris Office version and build numbers.
3. Touch the cover of a newspaper, magazine, or book
Pulse and follow the on-screen instructions to start reading.
Pulse News gives you news visually in bite-sized pieces.
Each article is a small square filled with the headline and an
associated image. Pulse incorporates colorful panning story
bars and fills them with content from your favorite websites.
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Pulse.
The Pulse main menu displays.

Samsung Apps Deleting the Screensaver Icon
Connect to Samsung Apps and make your smart device even As the screen says, you may delete the Screensaver icon
smarter. Simply and easily download an abundance of from the Apps screen at any time.
applications to your tablet such as games, news, reference, 1. Touch and hold the Screensaver icon until Remove
social networking, navigation, and more. appears in the Application Bar.
2. Drag the Screensaver icon to the Remove icon to
Tip: A shortcut to Samsung Apps displays on the main Home
remove it.
screen by default.
Screensaver Options
From the Home screen, touch Samsung Apps. Use the Screensaver options to:
– or – • Enable Screensaver: Touch the check box to enable the
From a Home screen, touch Apps Screensaver to play when your screen automatically times out.
➔ Samsung Apps. • Enable Touch To Stop: Touch the check box to enable the touch
Screensaver to stop feature, which means you can touch anywhere on the
screen to stop the Screensaver video once it starts playing.
When your tablet screen automatically times out, instead of a
blank screen, enable the Galaxy Tab Screensaver, which is Tip: Touch Back to stop the Screensaver video even if
actually an action-packed video tour of all the fantastic Enable Touch To Stop is enabled.
features that you will find on your Galaxy Tab.
From a Home screen, touch Apps • Start Screensaver: Start the Screensaver video without waiting
➔ Screensaver. for automatic screen timeout.
The Galaxy Tab 8.9 Screensaver Settings screen
displays.
169
• Device Screen timeout: Set the length of delay between the last Social Hub
key press or screen touch and the automatic screen timeout. For Access your social networks, like Facebook, Twitter, and
more information, refer to “Screen Timeout” on page 185. LinkedIn, and your email all in one place.
Search 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Search the internet using the GoogleTM search engine. ➔ Social Hub.
For more information, refer to “Search” on page 99. The Welcome to Social Hub screen displays.
2. Touch Set up now to add an account.
Tip: The Google Search widget displays by default on all Home
– or –
screens. For information about displaying widgets on the
Home screen, see “Adding Widgets to a Home screen” on Touch Set up later to skip adding an account and
page 29. display the Social Hub Feeds screen.
3. Touch the Feeds tab to display your social network
From a Home screen, touch Google. feeds or touch the Messages tab to display your email
– or – and SNS messages.
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Search.
Settings
Configure your device to your preferences.
For more information, refer to “Settings” on page 176.
➔ Settings.

Add an Account Social Hub Messages Options
To add an account: To display Social Hub messages options:
1. Touch Add account. 1. Touch the Messages tab.
The Add account screen displays. 2. Touch Menu.
2. Touch the account you want to add and then enter the The following options display:
required information, such as email address and • Delete: Touch the check box to select each message to delete,
password. or touch Select all, then touch Delete.
The added account now appears on the Social Hub • Accounts: Lists all accounts accessed by Social Hub.
Accounts screen with any other accounts. – Touch Add account to add another account.
3. Touch an account entry to start the application. – Touch Remove account and touch the check box next to
Update Your Status each account you want to delete, then touch Delete.
To update your status: • Mark as unread: Touch the check box to select each message
1. Touch the Feeds tab. to mark as unread, then touch Mark.
2. Touch Status update and use the keyboard to enter • List by: Set how you want to list messages. Options are: Date
your status. (Most recent), Date (Oldest), or Sender.
3. Touch Photo to upload a picture or video, or take a
picture or capture a video to upload.
4. Touch Update to post your status and photos.
171
Talk Video Player
Use Google Talk to chat with other Google Talk users. View and manage videos stored on your tablet.
For more information, refer to “Google Talk” on page 76. For more information, refer to “Video Player” on page 125.
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Talk. From a Home screen, touch Apps
Task Manager ➔ Video Player.
View and manage active applications on your device. Words Free
For more information, refer to “Task Manager” on page 12. Play Words With Friends free, the number one mobile word
To launch Task Manager: game, with anyone who also has the app installed on their
mobile device. Experience for yourself why millions of
players are addicted to the word building, triple score
➔ Task manager. seeking, chat bubble sending goodness of Words With
– or – Friends.
Touch Navigation and then touch Task manager. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps
To quickly display the Task manager pop-up: ➔ Words Free.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to log in or create an
Touch and hold Home.
account.
– or –
From any screen, touch Mini App Tray at the
bottom, center of the screen and then touch
Task manager.
The Task manager pop-up displays.

World Clock 4. Touch the on the pop-up to add the city.
View the date and time in any time zone. 5. Touch Reorder to change the order of the cities.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps Touch the grid on an entry and drag the entry to a
➔ World clock. new position in the list. Touch Done to change the
A map of the world displays with the locations you order.
have added flagged. 6. Touch Remove to delete entries. Touch the box to
check the cities you want to delete (a green check
2. Touch Add to add a city to display.
mark displays), then touch Remove.
A list of world cities displays in landscape mode.
7. Touch and hold an entry to remove it or to set the
3. Scroll through the list and touch the city you want to DST settings, which enable or disable Daylight Savings
add. Time adjustments.
Tip: Touch the first letter of the city’s name, to the right of the Yahoo! Finance
list, to find the city more quickly. Stay on top of the markets with the Yahoo! Finance app for
Android devices. Get real-time quotes, follow the market, or
– or – check out a particular stock. View headline news, top stories,
In portrait or landscape mode, touch and turn the globe and videos from Tech Ticker. Yahoo! Finance lets you keep up
with the market movers from your Android phone.
to locate a city and touch the city you want to add.
To add the Yahoo! Finance widget to a Home screen, see
A pop-up displays the city name, the current time and “Adding Widgets to a Home screen” on page 29.
date there, and the GMT offset.
173
Adding Your First Stock 3. Touch Add to add another stock. For more
To add your first stock: information, refer to “Adding Your First Stock” on
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget. page 174.
The Yahoo! Finance main screen displays with 4. Touch Menu to display the following options:
Samsung and Yahoo stocks listed by default. • Delete: Touch to delete the stock being displayed.
• Change order: Displays your stocks list. Touch and drag stocks
2. Touch Add.
to change the order in which they are displayed.
3. Type in a stock name.
• Search: Touch to search for a new stock.
4. Touch the key on the keyboard to start the search
and touch an entry in the list of stocks that is • Settings: Displays the following option:
displayed. – Auto refresh: Choose a time interval for automatic refreshing
of stock information. The choices are: None, Every 30 minutes,
5. The Yahoo! Finance widget displays with information
Every 1 hour, and Every 3 hours. When the setting is None,
about the stock just added.
touch the refresh icon on the Yahoo! Finance widget to update
Managing Stocks stock information.
Once you add a stock, there are additional Yahoo! Finance
5. Under the My Stocks tab, touch a stock entry to display
options you can use to add more stocks and set up how they
the full stock information screen.
are displayed and refreshed.
6. Touch the Major indices tab to display a summary of
1. From a Home screen, touch an entry in the Yahoo!
Finance widget. the performance of major groupings of stocks,
classified by the exchange on which they trade.
Information about the stock displays.
7. Touch the Currencies tab to display the currency
2. Touch Refresh to update the information. exchange rate for various currencies.

Additional Options YouTube
There are more options available from the full stock View and upload YouTube videos, right from your device.
information screen. For more information, refer to “YouTube” on page 100.
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.
The full stock information screen for one of your stocks Tip: A shortcut to YouTube appears on the main Home screen
displays. by default.
2. If you have added more than one stock, touch a From the Home screen, touch YouTube.
heading bar to display the full stock information screen – or –
for the stock.
3. Near the center of the screen, touch 1d (1 day),
➔ YouTube.
5d (5 days), 1m (1 month), 3m (3 months), 6m (6
months), or 1y (1 year) to view a stock performance
graph for the requested period.
4. At the bottom, right of the screen, touch Y! More
Information to link to the Yahoo! Finance website.
5. At the bottom of the screen, touch Quotes delayed to
read about real-time exchange quotes and access
other Yahoo! Finance online options, such as Top
Stories and a currency converter.
175
Section 11: Settings
This section explains Settings for customizing your device. Wi-Fi
Accessing Settings Your device supports Wi-Fi a/b/g/n. Use Wi-Fi settings to
From a Home screen, touch Apps manage your device’s Wi-Fi connections.
➔ Settings. For more information about using your device’s Wi-Fi
– or – features, see “Wi-Fi” on page 137.
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
From any screen, touch the Time in the System Bar,
When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically
then touch Settings. For more information, refer to
searches for available, in-range Wireless Access Points
“Quick Settings” on page 25.
(WAPs).
The Settings screen displays.
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch
The Settings Screen Wi-Fi from the Quick Settings menu.
The Settings screen has tabs on the left side of the screen. For more information, refer to “Quick Settings” on
Information related to the tabs displays on the right side of page 25.
the screen. There are four major groups of settings: Wireless
– or –
and network, Device, Personal, and System.
Wireless and Network From a Home screen, touch Apps
➔ Settings. On the Wi-Fi tab, touch the OFF / ON
Control your device’s wireless connections.
icon to turn Wi-Fi on or off.
Settings 176
Add Wi-Fi Network Advanced Settings
To open a dialog where you can add a Wi-Fi network by Set up and manage wireless access points.
entering its Network SSID (the name it broadcasts), security 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
type, and other properties: ➔ Wi-Fi.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings 2. Touch Menu ➔ Advanced.
➔ Wi-Fi, and then touch Add network.
The following options display:
2. Use the keyboard to enter Network SSID.
• Network notification: Have your device alert you to new
3. Touch the Security field and then touch a security type.
Wireless Access Points (WAPs). Touch Network notification to
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP, turn notifications On or Off. When enabled, a check mark
additional network information may be required, such as appears in the check box.
a Password. • Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: Specify when to disconnect from
Wi-Fi. Option are: Always, Only when plugged in, or Never.
4. If necessary, touch Password and enter the password or • MAC address: View your device’s MAC address, required
hex key. when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
5. Touch Save. • IP address: View your device’s IP address.
177
Bluetooth Additional Bluetooth Settings
Use Bluetooth settings to manage Bluetooth connections, set When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
your device’s name, and control your device’s visibility. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
Turning Bluetooth On or Off ➔ Bluetooth.
To turn your device’s Bluetooth service On or Off: 2. Touch Scan for devices to scan for nearby discoverable
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch devices. After searching, touch a device to pair with it.
Bluetooth from the Quick Settings menu. For more information, refer to “Pairing with a Bluetooth
For more information, refer to “Quick Settings” on Device” on page 140.
page 25. 3. Touch Menu and select a Bluetooth setting to
configure:
– or –
• Device name: Your device’s default name displays on screen.
Touch to change the device name. Available when Bluetooth is
➔ Settings. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the turned On.
OFF / ON icon to turn Bluetooth on or off.
• Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to
For more information about using Bluetooth to exchange automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5
information with other Bluetooth devices, see “Bluetooth” on minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.
page 139.
• Show received files: Show the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
Settings 178
Data Usage Airplane Mode
From this screen you can view the Wi-Fi or Ethernet data Airplane mode allows you to use many of your tablet’s
usage. features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings in an airplane or in any other area where accessing data is
➔ Data usage. prohibited.
2. Touch the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and Important! When your tablet is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
select a date. access online information or applications.
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of Press and hold the Power button then touch Airplane
data usage by application. mode.
– or –
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
may account for data usage differently.
➔ More ... ➔ Airplane mode, touch the check box, and
then touch OK to turn on Airplane mode.
More Settings
This tab displays additional wireless and network A check mark appears in the check box when
information. Airplane mode is On.
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Kies via Wi-Fi

➔ More .... Wi-Fi configuration and usage by Kies Air.
Options display for Airplane mode, Kies via Wi-Fi, VPN, 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
and Wi-Fi Direct. ➔ More ... ➔ Kies via Wi-Fi.
2. Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.
179
VPN 4. Touch Save to save your VPN settings.
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Connecting To a VPN
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
➔ More ... ➔ VPN.
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
2. Touch the VPN to which you want to connect.
configure one.
3. In the pop-up that opens, enter any requested
Adding a VPN credentials.
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN 4. Touch Connect.
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), Edit a VPN
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre- 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT ➔ More ... ➔ VPN.
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec). 2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.
Note: You must also set a screen unlock PIN or password 3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Edit network.
before you can use credential storage. For more 4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.
information, refer to “Screen Lock” on page 192. 5. Touch Save.
Delete a VPN
2. Touch Add VPN network.
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.
3. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Delete network.
by your network administrator.
Settings 180
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service
You can configure your device to connect directly with other active and running before it is detected by your device.
Wi-Fi capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data
between devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi The direct connection establishes, the status field
Direct communication. This connection is direct and not via a
displays “Connected”, and your connected device is
hot spot or WAP.
displayed in the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi Direct” on page 138.
network connection. Device
This section of the Settings screen contains settings for your
device.
➔ More ... ➔ Wi-Fi Direct.
2. Touch the OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi Direct
Sound
on. General
Your device begins to search for other devices enabled Set the volume level for all types of sounds.
with Wi-Fi direct connections. Note: You can only set volume when Silent Mode is disabled.
3. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.
4. When scanning is complete, touch a device name to 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
begin the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct ➔ Sound ➔ Volume.
compatible device.
181
2. Touch and drag the sliders to set the volume for: Notifications
• Music, video, games, and other media: Sounds made by Select a default ringtone for message, alarm, and other
music apps, video apps, and more. notifications.
• Notifications: Sounds for alerts to new messages and other 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
events. ➔ Sound ➔ Default notifications.
• System: Application sounds and other sounds made by your 2. Touch a ringtone to hear a sample and select it.
device. 3. Touch OK to save the setting.
Set your tablet to make sounds and vibrate:
Tip: You can also set System volume from the Home screen by
pressing the Volume Key.
➔ Sound ➔ Sound and vibration.
3. Touch OK to save your settings. 2. Touch the check box to turn on Sound and vibration
mode.
Set the intensity of vibration for notifications and screen
touch feedback. A check mark appears in the check box when
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Sound and vibration mode is On.
➔ Sound.
2. Touch Vibration intensity.
3. Touch and drag the Notification or Vibrate on screen tap
slider to set the vibration intensity.
4. Touch OK to save your settings.
Settings 182
System Display
You can activate or deactivate both touch and screen lock Screen Display
sounds. Home Screen and Lock Screen Wallpaper
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen or
➔ Sound. Lock screen. Choose from preloaded wallpaper images or
2. Touch Touch sounds or Screen lock sound (both default select a photo you have downloaded or taken with the
to On). Camera.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
box. ➔ Display.
3. Touch Vibrate on screen tap to enable or disable 2. Touch Home screen wallpaper or Lock screen wallpaper.
vibration when you touch or tap the screen. The Select wallpaper from screen displays the
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check following options: Gallery, Live wallpapers, and
box. When Vibrate on screen tap is enabled, the device Wallpapers.
vibrates to indicate screen touches and other For more information, refer to “Wallpapers” on
interactions. page 34.
To show help text on the lock screen:
➔ Display.
2. Touch Help text.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check
box.
183
General Auto-Rotate Screen
Brightness When this option is checked, the screen orientation changes
Set the default screen brightness. when you rotate the device. When this option is not checked,
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings the screen orientation locks in the current orientation
(landscape or portrait) and the orientation does not change
➔ Display ➔ Brightness.
when you rotate the device.
2. Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or touch
Automatic brightness.
➔ Display.
3. Touch OK to save the setting.
2. Touch Auto-rotate screen to enable or disable the
Screen Mode
auto-rotate feature.
Set the screen mode.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Tip: Touch the Time in the System Bar to display the Quick
➔ Display ➔ Screen mode. Settings pop-up. Touch Screen rotation to enable or
2. Touch Dynamic, Standard, or Movie then touch OK. disable the auto-rotate feature. For more information,
refer to “Quick Settings” on page 25.
Settings 184
Quick Launch Screen Timeout
The Quick Launch feature allows you to set multifunctional Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen
softkey to open applications. touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
➔ Display. ➔ Display.
2. Touch Quick launch. 2. Touch Screen timeout and select the screen delay time.
3. Touch None, Screen capture, Applications, Search, or The screen delays shutting off after inactivity for the
Camera. selected period of time.
If you choose Screen capture, touch the softkey to Font Style and Size
capture an image of the current screen and edit the Set the font for screen displays and the size you want it to
image. Touch and hold to capture and add an image of display.
the current screen to the clipboard. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
The screen image is saved in the /Root/Pictures/ ➔ Display.
Screenshots folder. For more information, refer to “My 2. Touch Font style then touch a font or touch Get fonts
Files” on page 162. online to browse and download a new font.
3. Touch Font size and select a font size.
185
Auto Adjust Screen Power 3. Touch Custom power saving settings to refine your
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the power saving settings.
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power. • Touch Power saving starts at to set when power saving starts.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Options are: 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50% battery power.
➔ Display. • Check the appropriate box to turn off Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, or
2. Touch Auto adjust screen power to enable or disable the Sync.
mode. • Touch Brightness to adjust screen brightness. Touch the
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check second Brightness option to set the brightness to 10, 30, 50,
box. 70, or 100 percent.
Power Saving • Touch Screen timeout to set the length of delay between the
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the last key press or screen touch and the automatic screen
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power. timeout (dim and lock).
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings • Touch OK to save your settings.
➔ Power saving. 4. Touch Learn about power saving to display more
2. Touch Custom power saving to enable or disable the information about saving power.
mode.
box.
Settings 186
Storage
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery
From this menu you can view the device memory. use.
Device Memory
From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Applications
➔ Storage. You can download and install applications from Google Play
The Device memory displays as Total space, Apps, or create applications using the Android SDK and install them
Pictures, videos, Audio, Downloads, Miscellaneous on your device. Use Applications settings to manage
files, and Available space. applications.
Battery Warning! Because this device can be configured with system

See how much battery power is used for device activities. software not provided by or supported by Google or
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings any other company, end-users operate these devices
➔ Battery. at their own risk.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
Memory Usage
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
usage displays in percentages per application.
applications.
2. Touch Screen or Android System to view how the 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
display and the Android system are affecting battery ➔ Applications.
use. 2. Touch Downloaded or Running to display memory
usage for that category of applications.
187
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows • Uninstall: Deletes the application from the tablet.
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom For more information, refer to “Uninstalling an App” on
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM. page 142.
• Clear data: Clears application data from memory.
Downloaded
• Clear cache: If the app stores data in a temporary area of the
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
device's memory, and the amount of information stored is
displayed, touch this button to clearing the temporary storage.
➔ Applications.
• Clear defaults: If you have configured an app to launch
2. Touch Downloaded to view a list of all the downloaded
certain file types by default, clear that setting.
applications on your device.
• Permissions: Lists the kinds of information about your device
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
and data to which the app has access.
Downloaded tabs, touch Touch Menu ➔ Sort by
Running Services
size or Sort by name.
View and control services running on your device.
4. Touch an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
➔ Applications.
settings, and permissions.
2. Touch the Running tab.
The following options are displayed:
All the applications that are currently running on the
• Force stop: Stops an app that is misbehaving. Restart your
device display.
device if stopping an app, process, or service causes your
device to stop working correctly. 3. Touch Show cached processes to display all the cached
processes that are running. Touch Show services in use
to switch back.
Settings 188
4. Touch one of the applications to view application Adding an Account
information. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
The following options display: ➔ Accounts and sync.
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is 2. Touch Add account.
usually done prior to uninstalling the application. 3. Touch one of the account types.
4. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services credentials and set up the account.
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System. Tip: For more information about the types of accounts that you
can add, see “Accounts” on page 54.
• Report: Report failure and other application information.
Removing an Account
Note: Options vary by application.
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its
Personal messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
This section of the Settings screen lets you manage the
personal settings for your device.
Accounts and Sync ➔ Accounts and sync.
Set up and manage accounts, including your Google and
2. Touch an account to display its settings.
email accounts.
3. Touch Remove account, then touch Remove account
at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its
messages, contacts, and other data.
189
Synchronizing Account 3. Touch Sync now to synchronize all data for the selected
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account account.
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more. – or –
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Under Data and synchronization, touch the account
➔ Accounts and sync. data to synchronize, such as, Calendar, Contacts,
2. Touch Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Touch Email, and so on.
Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.
Signing In to your Samsung Account
3. On the Auto-sync field, touch the OFF / ON icon
Several applications and options require that you create and
to turn Auto-sync on or off, which controls whether sign in to a Samsung Account.
changes you make to information on your device or on To sign in to your Samsung account:
the web are automatically synced with each other.
Data and Synchronization ➔ Accounts and sync.
To sync account information manually: 2. Touch Add account and then touch Samsung
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings account.
➔ Accounts and sync. The Samsung account sign in screen displays.
2. Touch an account to display its settings.
3. Touch variety of services to display information about
Samsung services that are available.
Settings 190
4. If you have no Samsung account: The Accounts and sync screen displays with your
• Touch Create new account. Samsung Account listed under Manage accounts.
The Country list of countries displays. Location Services
• Touch a country in the list (for example, United States) and
You value your privacy. So, by default, your device only
touch OK. acquires your location when you allow it. To use
The Samsung account Terms and conditions screen displays. Location-Based Services, you must first enable location
• Touch Privacy policy to display the Samsung Privacy Policy. services on your device.
• Touch I accept all the terms above and then touch Agree to Use Wireless Networks
continue or touch Back to return to the Accounts and Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
sync screen. your location or search for places of interest, you must
– or – enable the Use wireless networks option or enable the GPS
satellites.
If you do have a Samsung account, touch Sign in.
The Samsung account screen displays.
➔ Location services.
5. Use the keyboard to enter the required information and 2. Touch Use wireless networks to enable location
touch Sign up or Sign in. information using the wireless network.
Use GPS Satellites
Tip: The password is for your Samsung account, not the
password you use for the email address you are entering.
Plus, you can use only letters, numbers, !, @, $, %, &, ^, ➔ Location services.
and * for your Samsung account password. 2. Touch Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.
191
Location and Google Search • Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
➔ Location services. change your screen unlock pattern.
2. Touch Location and Google search to use your location • PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
data for improved Google Search results and other • Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
Google services.
Note: Additional options are available only if you set Screen
Security
lock to display the lock screen (any setting other than
Screen Lock
Swipe or None).
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see Lock Automatically
“Securing Your Device” on page 14.
Use this option to set how quickly to lock the screen after the
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings screen automatically turns off.
➔ Security. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
2. Touch Screen lock for these settings: ➔ Security.
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. 2. Touch Lock automatically and touch an option.
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it. Options are: Immediately; 5, 15, or 30 seconds; 1, 2, 5,
• Face unlock: Look at your tablet to unlock it. Follow the 10, or 30 minutes.
on-screen instructions to set up Face unlock.
Settings 192
Lock Instantly With Power Key Owner Information
Use this option to enable the lock screen when the power key Use this option to enable or disable whether to show owner
is pressed. If this option is not enabled, the screen dims or information on the lock screen.
brightens when the power key is pressed. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings ➔ Security.
➔ Security. 2. Touch Owner information and then touch Show owner
2. Touch Lock instantly with power key. info on lock screen to enable or disable the option.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check 3. Touch the text field and use the keyboard to enter the
box. text to display on the lock screen.
Vibrate On Screen Tap Encryption
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your tablet
➔ Security. each time you power it on:
2. Touch Vibrate on screen tap. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check ➔ Security.
box. 2. Touch Encrypt device. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.

Encryption takes an hour or more.
193
Find My Mobile For more information about Samsung accounts, see
To allow your device to be locked and tracked, and for your “Signing In to your Samsung Account” on page 190.
data to be deleted remotely. You must sign up for both a Enable or Disable Remote Controls
Samsung account and Google account to use Remote
Once you have signed in to your Samsung Account, you can
controls.
enable or disable Remote controls.
Sign In To Your Samsung Account
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings ➔ Security ➔ Remote controls.
➔ Security.
2. Enter your Samsung account password in the pop-up
2. Touch Remote controls.
Enter password field and touch Done.
If you are not signed on to your Google account, a
message displays Register Google account first. For
box.
more information, refer to “Setting Up Your Gmail
SamsungDive Web Page
Account” on page 64.
To launch the SamsungDive web page:
The Samsung account screen displays.
3. Touch Create new account to create a Samsung ➔ Security ➔ SamsungDive web page.
account. 2. Touch the Help tab to display more information about
– or – Remote Controls.
Touch Sign in, if you already have a Samsung account,
enter your Email address and your Samsung account
password, and touch Sign in.
Settings 194
Passwords 3. Read the message and touch OK to allow installation of
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you non-Google Play applications.
touch them while entering passwords. When enabled, a check mark appears in the check
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings box.
➔ Security.
2. Touch Make passwords visible to enable or disable brief Warning! Enabling this option causes your tablet and personal
displays of password characters. data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
box.
Credential Storage
Device Administration Trusted Credentials
To add or remove device administrators: If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
➔ Security. remove it.
2. Touch Device administrators. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
Enable or disable installation of non-Google Play ➔ Security.
applications. 2. Touch Trusted credentials.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
➔ Security. • System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
2. Touch Unknown sources. in the ROM of your device.
An informational pop-up displays. • User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
195
3. Touch a CA certificate to examine its details. Clear Credentials
A scrolling screen displays the details. Clear stored credentials.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and touch
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to certificates.
remove a User certificate.
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable
➔ Security.
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a 2. Touch Clear credentials to remove all certificates.
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently Language and Input
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed. Language
Set the language used by your device.
5. Touch OK to return to the certificate list.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check ➔ Language and input ➔ Language.
box.
2. Touch a language / locale from the list.
Install from Device Storage Keyboards and Input Methods
Install encrypted certificates from a storage device, such as a Set the keyboard used by your device.
PC, with the USB cable. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings ➔ Language and input.
➔ Security.
2. Touch Default and select a keyboard.
2. Touch Install from device storage, then choose a
The options are: Samsung keyboard and Swype.
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
Settings 196
3. Touch Configure input methods. • XT9: Enable or disable XT9 predictive text. When enabled the
4. Touch Google voice typing to automatically use Google system suggests words matching your text entries, and,
voice typing. optionally, completes common words automatically.
5. Touch next to Google voice typing, then touch When XT9 is enabled, touch the XT9 advanced settings field to
Select input languages. set the following options:
• Select Automatic to use the local language or select a – Word completion: Enable or disable automatic word
completion for words matching your text entries.
language from the list.
6. Touch Block offensive words to enable or disable
– Word completion point: Choose the number of letters for the
system to use to predict words for automatic completion.
blocking of recognized offensive words from the results
of your voice-input Google searches. – Spell correction: Enable or disable automatic spell checking
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check and correction.
box. – Next word prediction: When enabled, the system predicts the
next word based on common usage patterns.
Configuring the Samsung Keyboard
– Auto-substitution: When enabled, the system automatically
To configure the Samsung keyboard:
replaces words you enter with words from the XT9 auto-
Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display the substitution list.
following options:
– Regional correction: When enabled, the system automatically
• Input language: Used to set a default text entry language.
changes the spelling of words based on norms for your locale.
Touch this field, scroll through the options, and touch the
– Recapture: When enabled, the system re-displays matching
desired input language. When activated, a check appears in
words when you make corrections to a word inserted by the
the box.
system.
197
– XT9 my words: Add words to your XT9 predictive text – Pen colour: Choose a pen color.
dictionary. – Recognition type: Set the recognition after each stroke or after
– XT9 auto-substitution: Manage the list of words the system completion.
uses for auto-substitution (Auto-substitution setting must be – Gesture guide: Displays examples of the various gestures that
enabled). can be used to edit handwriting.
• Automatic period: Enable or disable automatic insertion of a – About: Displays information about the handwriting software.
“full stop” (period and space to end a sentence) by touching the • Tutorial: Displays help for using the Samsung keyboard and
space bar twice. XT9 predictive text.
• Sound on keypress: Check to play a brief sound each time you Configuring the Swype Keyboard
touch a key on the on-screen keyboard. To configure the Swype keyboard:
• Auto capitalization: Enable or disable auto-capitalization.
Touch next to Swype to display the following
When enabled, the system automatically capitalizes words in options:
your text based on common usage, such as at the beginning of
Select Input Method
sentences.
• Voice input: Enable or disable the Voice input feature. When • For more information, refer to “Keyboards and Input
Methods” on page 196.
enabled, you can choose to enter text by speaking the words,
using Google’s networked speech recognition feature. How to Swype
• Handwriting: Touch to display the following options: • Displays Swype help information. Touch a topic to view the
– Recognition time: Set the recognition time to 100, 300, 500, information.
1000, or 2000 milliseconds.
– Pen thickness: Set the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 pixels.
Settings 198
Personal dictionary • Reset Swype’s dictionary: Delete all words you have added to
• Add words to or delete words from your personal Swype the Swype dictionary.
dictionary. Touch + to add words and – to remove words. • Version: View the current Swype software version.
Preferences Language Options
• Audio feedback: When enabled, plays sounds as you enter • Allows you to select the languages available from the Swype
text. keyboard. To choose the desired language, touch the language
• Vibrate on keypress: When enabled, the device vibrates on key .
text entry. Speech
• Show tips: Turn on helpful tips from Swype. Set the speech settings for Voice search.
• Auto-spacing: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
when you pause entering text. ➔ Language and input.
• Auto-capitalization: When enabled, automatically capitalizes 2. Touch Voice search to configure:
the first letter of the first word in a sentence. • Language: Choose a language for your voice input.
• Show complete trace: When enabled, briefly display the • SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images
Swype trace. from the results of your voice-input Google searches.
• Word suggestion: When enabled, suggests possible matching • Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of
words as you enter text. recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
• Speed vs. accuracy: Send the sensitivity of Swype text Google searches.
recognition.
199
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example, Mouse/trackpad
the contents of email messages. This option sets your Pointer speed.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
➔Language and input. ➔ Language and input.
2. Touch Text-to-speech output and select the preferred 2. Touch Pointer speed then drag the slide to the right to
TTS engine. go faster or to the left to go slower.
3. Touch next to the preferred TTS engine and 3. Touch OK to save your setting.
configure.
Back Up and Reset
4. Configure the following:
Backup and Restore
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
Back Up My Data
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis
Enable or disable backup of your information to the Google
(available if voice data is installed).
server.
• Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
• Driving mode settings: When Driving mode is enabled, the ➔ Backup and reset.
following can be read: New emails, Schedule, and Unlock 2. Touch Back up my data to enable or disable back up of
screen. When an option is enabled, a check mark application data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other settings
appears in the check box. to the Google server.
Settings 200
Backup Account Personal Data
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the Factory Data Reset
Backup account option is available. Use Factory data reset to return your device to its factory
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings defaults. This setting erases all data from the device,
➔ Back up and reset. including Google or other email account settings, system and
2. Touch Backup account and touch your Google Gmail application data and settings, and downloaded applications,
account or touch Add account to set your Google Gmail as well as your music, photos, videos, and other files. If you
account to be backed up to the Google server. reset the tablet in this way, the next time you turn on your
tablet you are prompted to reenter the same kind of
Automatic Restore information as when you first started Android.
When enabled, backed-up settings are restored when you 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
reinstall an application. ➔ Backup and reset.
2. Touch Factory data reset.
➔ Back up and reset.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
2. Touch Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic
information.
restoration of settings from the Google server.
3. Touch Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform
the reset.
Note: If you have set up your Samsung account, it has to be

deleted before performing this function. For more
information, refer to “Removing an Account” on
page 189.
201
System • Select time zone: Choose your local time zone (only available
Dock when the Automatic setting is disabled).
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings • Use 24-hour format: Set the format for time displays.
➔ Dock. • Select date format: Set the format for date displays.
2. Touch Dock sound. Accessibility
The tablet will not play sounds when inserting and Accessibility services are special features to make using the
removing the device from the dock when enabled. device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
box. Note: You can download accessibility applications from Google
Date and Time Play and manage their use here.
By default, your device receives date and time information
Services
from the wireless network. When you are outside network
coverage, you may want to set date and time information Enable or disable accessibility services.
manually using the Date & time settings.
Note: You must activate Accessibility before enabling services.
➔ Date and time. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
2. Configure the following settings: ➔ Accessibility.
• Set date: Enter the current date (only available when the 2. Touch TalkBack to activate TalkBack.
Automatic setting is disabled).
• Set time: Enter the current time (only available when the
Automatic setting is disabled).
Settings 202
• Install Web scripts: Touch Allow to allow applications to install
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
scripts from Google that make their Web content more
to help blind and low-vision users.
accessible.
3. Touch the OFF / ON icon to turn TalkBack on. Motion
4. Touch Settings to configure TalkBack. It is possible to control certain aspects of your tablet by
simply tilting it. You can tilt your tablet to reduce or enlarge
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter, the screen. You can move an icon from one Home page to
except passwords, including personal data and another by panning your device to the left or right while
credit card numbers. It may also log your user holding the icon.
interface interactions with the device. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
➔ Motion.
System
2. Touch Motion activation to make the following options
available. Touch the OFF / ON icon to activate
➔ Accessibility.
each option.
2. Configure the following settings: • Touch Tilt to zoom or Pan to edit.
• Font size: Set a font size. Options are: Tiny, Small, Normal,
• Touch Sensitivity to set the sensitivity by dragging the slider
Large, and Huge.
between Slow and Fast.
• Auto-rotate screen: Automatically rotates the screen from
Touch Test to test your setting, OK to save your changes, or
landscape to portrait orientation and vice versa. Cancel to stop without making the change.
• Speak passwords: Speaks passwords to enter them. • Touch Learn about tilt or Learn about panning for more
• Tap and hold delay: Touch a delay time. Options are: Short, information.
Medium, and Long.
203
Developer Options
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.
Set options for application development.
USB Debugging 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is ➔ Developer options.
attached to a PC by a USB cable. 2. Touch Allow mock locations to enable or disable the
setting.
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings box.
➔ Developer options. Desktop Backup Password
2. Touch USB debugging to enable or disable the setting. Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
box. ➔ Developer options.
Development Device ID 2. Touch Desktop backup password.
The identification number for your tablet when using it as a 3. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup
development tool displays in this field. password, the new password for full backups, then
Allow Mock Locations enter the new password again.
This setting is used by developers when developing 4. Touch Set backup password to save the password
location-based applications. change.
Settings 204
User Interface • Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation
Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the (ranges from off to 10x).
way the screen behaves when using applications or • Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for
displaying data. transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings Apps
➔ Developer options. 1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings
2. Touch the check box next to each option to enable: ➔ Developer options.
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications 2. Touch Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as
perform long operations on the main thread. soon as the application is closed.
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched 3. Touch Limit background processes to set the number of
on the screen. processes that can run in the background. Options are:
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen. Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they processes at most.
update. 4. Touch Show all ANRs to display a prompt when
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage. applications running in the background are not
• Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications. responding.
205
About Device • Model number: Display your device’s model number.
View information about your device, including status, legal • Android version: Display the firmware version of your device.
information, hardware and software versions, and battery • Kernel version: Display the kernel version of your device.
use. • Build number: Display your device’s build number.
Software Update
➔ About device.
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device
2. Touch items to view details: to connect to the network and download any new software
• Software update: Connect to the network and download new directly to your device. The device automatically updates
software. For more information, refer to “Software Update” with the latest available software when you access this
on page 206. option.
• Status: View Battery status, Battery level, IP address, Wi-Fi
MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and Note: Before you can check for system updates, you must set
up a Gmail account. For more information, refer to
Device status.
“Setting Up Your Gmail Account” on page 64.
• Legal information: Display Open source licenses, Google
legal, and License settings information.
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and

information about registering your device to play DivX
protected video, touch License settings ➔ DivX® VOD.
Settings 206
Software Update Options • Auto update: Enable this option to allow your device to
Once you have set up your Gmail account, you can check for automatically check for updates monthly.
a software update. • Push messages: Enable or disable whether you want to be
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps ➔ Settings notified of an available software.
➔ About device.
2. Touch Software update.
The following options display:
• Update: Touch this option to check for a software update.
A Disclaimer screen displays the first time you touch Update.
– Touch the Select your country field and touch your country, if
the correct country does not appear in the field.
– Touch Terms and conditions and Privacy policy, read the
information, and touch Confirm.
Your device is registered, connected to the server, and a search
is performed for a software update.
The Software update pop-up displays. The device automatically
updates the software, if available. Otherwise, when the No
update available prompt displays, touch OK.
207
Section 12: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
using your Galaxy Tab. The terms “GALAXY” or “mobile Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
device” are used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab. cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
Read this information before using your mobile device. scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) problems.
Signals Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the
same network as cell phones and can use the same Radio of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
Frequency (RF) signals to communicate with the network as
researchers have reported biological changes associated
a cell phone. Therefore, although the following information
refers specifically to RF exposure from wireless phones, it with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
may apply similarly to GALAXY when it is being used on a cell
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone network.
phone and health problems.
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF) The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
includes the following information:
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
Health and Safety Information 208

The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
be confused with the effects from other types of between RF and certain health problems?
electromagnetic energy. The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. that have shown a connection have failed.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
genetic material. and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy, has supported additional research to address gaps in
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Interphone Study
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Interphone is a large international study designed to
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
radiation with relatively low frequencies. of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat. of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
209
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
being drawn from this data. Additional information about (MOBI-KIDS)
Interphone can be found at MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf. relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did from communication technologies including cell phones and
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA center study involving 14 European and non-European
continues to monitor developments in this field. countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users found at
(COSMOS) http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health view.php?ID=39.
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio Program of the National Cancer Institute
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
COSMOS study can be found at for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html. phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/.

Cell Phone Industry Actions Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA Accessories
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
to take a number of steps, including the following: If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
• Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones; know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
• Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
the user; and a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
• Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current • Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
information on cell phone use and human health concerns. • Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting your head and the cell phone.
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Hands-Free Kits
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non- Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure and various types of body-worn accessories such as
that safety standards continue to adequately protect the belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
public. reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
211
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF Children and Cell Phones
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
many states if you want to use your phone while driving. apply to children and teenagers as well.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head • Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
from RF Radiation
• Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
the head and the cell phone.
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
“hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
RF absorption. Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
• FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.

• Environmental Protection Agency (EPA): Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html. Certification Information
• Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): Your wireless mobile device is a radio transmitter and
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/. receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.) exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the
• National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH): Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S.
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/. Government.
• World Health Organization (WHO): These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/. recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
• International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
http://www.icnirp.de.
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
• Health Protection Agency: by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/. government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
• US Food and Drug Administration: scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/ energy.
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/ The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm. devices employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless devices to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
213
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
to give additional protection to the public and to account for FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
any variations in measurements. Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this
its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. model device as reported to the FCC are:
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified 2.4 GHz - Body: 1.01 W/kg
power level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while 5.2 GHz - Body: 0.89 W/kg
operating can be well below the maximum reported value. 5.3 GHz - Body: 0.86 W/kg
This is because the mobile device is designed to operate at 5.5 GHz - Body: 0.89 W/kg
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to 5.8 GHz - Body: 0.74 W/kg
reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a SAR information on this and other model mobile devices can
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of be accessed online on the FCC's website through http://
the mobile device. transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that
Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the pertains to a particular model mobile device, this site uses
public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does the mobile device FCC ID number, which is usually printed
not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for somewhere on the case of the mobile device.
each model mobile device are performed in positions and Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular mobile
locations (e.g. near the body) as required by the FCC. device, follow the instructions on the website and it should
For typical operations, this mobile device has been tested provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular
and meets FCC SAR guidelines. mobile device. Additional SAR information can also be

obtained at determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar- encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more
cellular-telephones. of the following measures:
FCC Part 15 Information to User • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device. that to which the receiver is connected.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
Smart Practices While Driving
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
On the Road - Off the Tablet
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation. The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply operation of his or her vehicle.
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a drinking, talking to passengers, or using a mobile device -
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while
interference to radio communications. However, there is no driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
interference to radio or television reception, which can be
215
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand an automobile:
and address distractions. Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
may be permitted in certain areas. an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
Before using your device to chat with friends, consider your result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
circumstances. Let the chat wait when driving conditions Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
require. Remember, driving comes first, nothing else! driver’s clear view of the street and traffic.
If you consider a chat necessary and appropriate, follow Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or
these tips: e-mail while operating a vehicle.
• Use a hands-free device; Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
• Secure your mobile device within easy reach; games while operating a vehicle.
• Chat when you are not moving; For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org.
• Plan chats when your car will be stationary; Battery Use and Safety
• Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations; The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the
• Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to
driving and will suspend the chat if necessary; be replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for
inspection and replacement.
• Do not take notes or look up information while driving;

• Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
liquids. Liquids can get into the GALAXY’s circuits, leading to
recharge your battery only with
corrosion. Even when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears
Samsung-approved chargers which are
to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a specifically designed for your GALAXY.
safety hazard. If the GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them
checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if WARNING!
they appear to be working properly. Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
• Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard.
heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY
the GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave chargers.
oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in • Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some
your car in high temperatures. websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable
• Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even
GALAXY or the battery may explode when overheated. counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories.
• Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on
If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is
a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If
compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
you suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service
center for inspection. • Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a
• Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious
injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard.
217
Samsung Mobile Products and FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
Recycling LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
Samsung accessories. INSTRUCTIONS.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
only important for safety, it benefits the environment. ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly. INSTRUCTIONS.
For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to: FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
http://mobile.samsungusa.com/recycling/index.jsp or call AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
1-800-822-8837 for more information. OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
To find the nearest recycling location, go to: POWER OUTLET.
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
explode.
Display / Touch-Screen
UL Certified Travel Charger Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable
UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
instructions per UL guidelines:

The display on your mobile device is made of glass or policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is Changes may affect the performance of location-based
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use technology on your mobile device.
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause Your Location
injury to you. Location-based information includes information that can be
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, you use applications that require location-based information
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a (e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic location-based information. The location-based information
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
third-parties providing services.
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
Navigation
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
Limited Warranty”.
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
GPS incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for time. In some areas, complete information may not be
location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense
219
before following them. All users should pay attention to road If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer,
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs. because this may damage the mobile device and could
Emergency Communication cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device
GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to
communications (medical emergencies, calls to 911, or you or damage to the mobile device.
communications to emergency services). GALAXY is not Extreme heat or cold
designed or intended to be used for such communications. Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) services which may be 113°F.
used on GALAXY to make phone calls do not support 911 Microwaves
calls and are only intended for talking with friends.
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Care and Maintenance Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and Dust and Dirt
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
Cleaning solutions
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years: Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from: detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
Liquids of any kind
solution.
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
Shock or vibration
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
circuits.
handling can break internal circuit boards.

Paint hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
proper operation. that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
Responsible Listening that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss. You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud • Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as an audio source.
sound is played louder and for longer durations. • Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the volume at which you can hear adequately.
most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some • Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
scientific research suggests that using portable audio
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at
hearing.
high volume settings for long durations may lead to
permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use • When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
or other wireless devices). you can hear what you are listening to.
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
221
• Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, following sources:
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
American Academy of Audiology
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
Reston, VA 20190
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
Voice: (800) 222-2336
• Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
Email: info@audiology.org
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
Internet:
• Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. default.aspx
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
National Institute on Deafness and Other
normal.
Communication Disorders
• Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
National Institutes of Health
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or 31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/

National Institute for Occupational Safety Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
and Health (NIOSH) Devices
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200 Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Patriots Plaza Building Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
Washington, DC 20201 equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
discuss alternatives.
(1-800-356-4674)
Implantable Medical Devices
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328 A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
Internet: implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/ interference with the device.
default.html
Persons who have such devices:
1-888-232-6348 TTY • Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
Operating Environment from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is • Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or • Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory minimize the potential for interference;
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety • Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
223
• Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of Posted Facilities
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical notices require you to do so.
device, consult your health care provider. Potentially Explosive Environments
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf- Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
faqs.html#. potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
Other Medical Devices instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able point (service station).
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
mobile device off in health care facilities when any use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
that could be sensitive to external RF energy. atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
Vehicles include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
your vehicle engine.
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.

When your Device is Wet the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if Association.
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, Cautions
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
to a service center. expressly approved in this document could void your
Restricting Children's Access to Your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to
Mobile Device operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,
antennas, and chargers.
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others, The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous
and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories
damage the mobile device, or use services that increase your
cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Although
mobile device bill.
your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,
of the reach of small children.
bending, or sitting on it.
FCC Notice and Cautions Other Important Safety Information
FCC Notice
• Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
applicable to the device.
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied • Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with vehicle are securely mounted.
225
• Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your • Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
vehicle is mounted and operating properly. or denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or
• When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can both.
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical • While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or • Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
electricity before inserting the headset. periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
• Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive immediately.
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its • Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
parts, or accessories. perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
• For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
result. during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
• Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use • If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
Section 13: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
What is covered and for how long?
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC. (“SAMSUNG”) dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
warrants that SAMSUNG’s devices and accessories electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
(“Products”) are free from defects in material and and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
workmanship under normal use and service for the period (c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
commencing upon the date of purchase by the first of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following (d) equipment that has the serial number or the
specified period of time after that date: enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
Tablet 1 Year
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
Batteries (Including 1 Year conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
Internal Batteries) ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
Case 90 Days SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
Other Tablet Accessories 1 Year adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
What is not covered?
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
Product by Purchaser. blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
227
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. This
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does Limited Warranty is extended to the Purchaser and is not
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a transferable or assignable to any other person or entity.
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for What must you do to obtain warranty service?
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has must return the Product to an authorized Tablet service
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG Tablet for
facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied
which it is specified.
by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
What are SAMSUNG's obligations? original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product and the seller's name and address.
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-800-SAMSUNG. If
without charge to Purchaser, or at SAMSUNG's sole option, SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
refund the purchase price. Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping,
SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.
reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing Purchaser should keep a separate backup copy of any
any Product, or may replace Product with a rebuilt, contents of the Product before delivering the Product to
reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases will SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the
be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of
repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period warranty service.
Warranty Information 228

What are the limits on SAMSUNG's liability? SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
SAMSUNG'S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT;
LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR,
GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE;
OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE
DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR EQUIPMENT.
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
APPLY TO YOU. claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
229
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
may also have other rights that vary from state to state. application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
What is the procedure for resolving disputes? Warranty.
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED $5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person's or entity's Product or unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.

This arbitration provision also applies to claims against out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
performance. Severability
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to Warranty.
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased; If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box; retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable). System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer Samsung Customer Care Center for details.
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
231
party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA,
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of which includes computer software and may include
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic
order to provide this service at no charge. If the documentation (“Software”).
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
BY CLICKING THE “I ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS
apply.
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE
Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS
85 Challenger Road
OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS
Ridgefield Park, New Jersey 07660
EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE “DECLINE” BUTTON, AND
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
©
2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights 1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
reserved. rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
change without notice. [111611] permanent storage media of one computer and use the
End User License Agreement for Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
Software and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
time. You may make one copy of the Software in
Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you
machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
that the backup copy must include all copyright or other
Electronics Co., Ltd. for software owned by Samsung
proprietary notices contained on the original.
Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated companies and its third

2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung 5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. and add-on components (if any) of the Software that
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold. Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly 6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation), the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent, which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting must include all of the Software (including all component
services with the Software. parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
its affiliates may collect and use technical information The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
gathered as part of the product support services related to consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
the Software provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
Samsung may use this information solely to improve its 7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
products or to provide customized services or technologies to Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
you and will not disclose this information in a form that You agree to comply with all applicable international and
personally identifies you. national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.
233
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
governments. any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,
rights under this License will terminate automatically without sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the third-party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to
copies, full or partial, of the Software. caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any
such third-party content, products, or services available on
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party
or through any such application. Purchaser acknowledges
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. SAMSUNG makes no representations and agrees that your use of any third-party application is
governed by such third-party application provider’s Terms of
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since SAMSUNG
Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such
has no control over such applications, Purchaser
acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible agreement and that any information or personal data you
provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-
for the availability of such applications and is not responsible
party application provider, will be subject to such third-party
or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or
other materials on or available from such applications. application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy exists.
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY
Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES
third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole risk and that
the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance, OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to Purchaser to 10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party
take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects Applications. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT,
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE
APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS
AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET
ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES
PURCHASER’S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR,
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR
DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS AVAILABLE” INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY.
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
235
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR (INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES 12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The
CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS, Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR "commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT, and "commercial software documentation" with only those
NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products
DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE provided to the United States Government pursuant to
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL with the commercial rights and restrictions described
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION elsewhere herein. All Software and Products provided to the
OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOT United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued
WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (JUNE
CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE 1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as
BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT applicable.
OF PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE of which is expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved • Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the governs your use of the software which forms part of, or enables
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. you to access, the Service; and
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the
• Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of
parties.
personal information in connection with your access to and use of
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
the Service.
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral By using the Service, you agree to be bound by the above
or written communications, proposals and representations documents. Please read through those documents to make
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to providing the Service to you.
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions You will be able to access additional features available at
shall continue in full force and effect. socialhub.samsungmobile.com.
Social Hub Social Hub Terms and Conditions
Legal Terms and Privacy Acceptance of the Terms
Samsung's Social Hub and (if applicable) the website where These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the
you accessed this Disclaimer (collectively, the "Service"), is Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence
being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co., Agreement (collectively "Terms") govern your use of Social
Ltd., and its affiliates and suppliers (collectively "Samsung") Hub, which comprises all content and services accessible
subject to the following enclosed documents: through Social Hub (including third party content and
• Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the services), and (if applicable) the website where you
Service generally; accessed these Terms (collectively the "Service"). The Terms
constitute an agreement between you and Samsung
237
Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates (collectively Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the
"Samsung") with respect to the Service. By using the Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service. The
Service, you agree to be legally bound to the Terms. person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally
You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to competent.
the Terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law, Your Information
Samsung reserves the right to modify, update, supplement, When required to provide information in connection with your
revise or otherwise change the Terms, and to impose new or use of the Service, you agree to provide truthful and
additional rules, policies, terms or conditions in relation to complete information. Providing misleading information
the Service, from time to time with or without notice to you about your identity is forbidden. When you first use the
("Amendments"). Service, you may be required to create a username and a
Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by password.
sending an email message to the email address listed in your You (and your parent or legal guardian, if you are a minor) are
account information (if any), or by posting the notice on the personally responsible for any use of the Service with your
Social Hub website. username and password.
Such Amendments will be effective immediately and You agree to take due care in protecting your username and
incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such password against misuse by others and promptly notify
notice. You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms. Samsung about any misuse.
Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to
constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments.
Termination of Service
Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain
Eligibility
parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have
To use the Service, you must be at least sixteen (16) years of breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion.
age. If you are at least sixteen (16 ) years of age but are a
minor for legal purposes where you live, you must review the
Your Material • Not submit unlawful, offensive, abusive, pornographic, harassing,
Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy, Samsung libelous or other inappropriate Material;
shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or • Respect the privacy of others;
content you have submitted in the course of using the • Obtain any consents, permission or licenses that may be required
Service ("Material") when your access to the Service is for you to have the legal right to submit any Material; and
terminated. Your submission of Material in the course of
• Not distribute or post spam, unreasonably large files, chain
using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the
letters, pyramid schemes, viruses or any other technologies that
Material to Samsung. After the Material is removed from the
Service by either you or Samsung, some traces of the may harm the Service, or the interest or property of the Service
Material may remain and copies of the Material may still users.
reside within the servers used in providing the Service. Unauthorized use of the Service (including any use in
However, Samsung does not claim ownership in your contravention of the Terms) is prohibited and may result in
Material. criminal prosecution and/or civil liability.
You represent and warrant that you have obtained any Restrictions
consents, permission or licenses that may be required for
You and any third party directed by You must not display,
you to have the legal right to submit any Material. Samsung copy, store, modify, sell, publish or redistribute the Service
reserves the right to terminate your access to the Service if
(whether all or any portion of it), and such displaying,
Samsung determines, at its sole discretion, that you have
copying, storing, modification, sale, publishing and
repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service. redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all
Using the Service necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the
You agree to: owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part.
• Use the Service only for your private, non-commercial purposes;
• Comply with applicable laws, the Terms and good manners;
239
You must not use the Service for any purposes other than Actions Required by Law
those permitted under the Terms. Without limiting this Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and/or
restriction, you must not use the service for any illegal data retention requirements imposed by your country of
purposes, to make unsolicited offers or advertisements, to residence or any other country in which you use the Service.
impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or
entity, to misrepresent, harass, defraud or defame others, to terminate your access to the Service, at any time in its sole
post obscene or unreasonably offensive material, to discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or
negatively present the Service, nor for any commercial regulatory agencies to do so.
purposes.
Third Party Sites and Content
Except as expressly permitted by the Terms, and except to
the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that
are owned or operated by third parties. Access to such sites
restraining you from doing so, you are not allowed to
does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the
disassemble, reverse engineer, tamper with the Service,
transmit malicious code or collect information of other users conduct, products or services on the site. Upon accessing
any such site, you must review and agree to the rules of use
through the Service.
of the relevant site before using the site.
You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of
You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control
or tamper with the Service or any content or service
contained in or provided through the Service, or any servers over the content, products or services of third-party sites and
does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such
used in providing the Service, or to unreasonably affect
content, products or services. Third party content and
others' enjoyment of the Service in any way.
services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any
content or service will remain available for any period of

time. Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service, or
liability for any interruption or suspension of any third party any part thereof, is appropriate or available for use in any
content or service. particular jurisdiction. If you choose to access the Service,
In addition, Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk, and you
customer service related to third party sites. Any question or are responsible for complying with all US federal, state and
request for service relating to third party sites should be local laws, rules and regulations.
made directly to the relevant site operator. Dealings with Others
Subscription Information You may interact with other users on or through the Service.
Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through You agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung
your service provider's network. Your network service and are solely between you and the other user(s).
provider may charge you for such data transmission. Intellectual Property
Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any The Service and related software are protected under
such charges. international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that
Availability copyrights are claimed by Samsung.
The Service may be network dependent - contact your Subject to the Terms, Samsung retains all right, title and
network service provider for more information. Samsung interest in the Service and in all Samsung's products,
reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to change, improve software and other properties provided to you or used by you
and correct the Service. The Service may not be available through the Service.
during maintenance breaks and other times. Samsung may Personal Data
also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in
The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional
its sole discretion. In such case you will be provided with
provisions govern the use of your personal information. When
prior notification.
you access the Service, Samsung may ask for or otherwise
241
collect certain personal information such as your email Samsung's servers, Samsung will not process the content or
address along with your user name and password and, in headers of your messages for any purpose other than as
certain cases, your mobile phone number so that we can necessary to deliver and manage your messages, unless
communicate with you, for example to send notifications of otherwise required by law.
incoming messages. When you use the Service, certain In connection with certain services accessible via the
technical information such as the type and serial number of Service, Samsung may cooperate with your operator and
your mobile device, Internet protocol address, your mobile other third parties. Samsung may receive from such third
network and country codes, timezone, technical details of parties certain device specific non-personal information,
your client as well as your transactions with Samsung, for such as device serial number of the devices sold by the
example your acceptance of the Terms, will be automatically operator with preinstalled software for the Service. Such
collected by Samsung. information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the
The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are Service.
explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy. Samsung may also LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
participate with your selected service providers in
THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE"
maintaining your contact lists.
BASIS. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW
The third party services and content you access through the AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, SAMSUNG DOES NOT
Service and the telecommunications carriers and the WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
network through which you access the Service are provided ERROR OR VIRUS-FREE.
and hosted by your selected third party content and service
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND
providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own. We
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
recommend you familiarize yourself with your service
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
provider's privacy policy. Samsung is not responsible for the
TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR
privacy or any other practices of such service providers.
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
Although your messages will be transmitted through
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE
AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OF THE SERVICE, PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS, THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR
INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS.
THROUGH THE SERVICE. YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE
SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE
FROM VARIOUS SOURCES. EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE
SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A
THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE LIMITED EXTENT. THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO
ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE, NOR SHALL SAMSUNG THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS. IF THESE STATUTORY
BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED PROVISIONS APPLY, TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS
ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES. ABLE TO DO SO, SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER
YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES, THOSE PROVISIONS TO, AT ITS OPTION, IN THE CASE OF
LOSSES, COSTS, OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR SERVICES (A) THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN; OR
INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED (B) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES
BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL SUPPLIED AGAIN AND, IN THE CASE OF GOODS, (A) THE
INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF
MISCONDUCT, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH EQUIVALENT GOODS; (B) THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS; (C) THE
RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE (INCLUDING DIRECT, PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS; OR (D) THE PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES). THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED.
243
Indemnification Miscellaneous
You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Samsung The Terms (including all documents comprising the Terms)
from and against any and all third party claims and all constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung,
liabilities, assessments, losses, costs or damages resulting and supersedes any prior agreement between you and
from or arising out of i) your breach of the Terms, ii) your Samsung, with respect to your use of the Service. Your use of
infringement or violation of any intellectual property, other any third-party content or service accessed via the Service
rights or privacy of a third party, iii) misuse of the Service by will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with,
a third party where such misuse was made possible due to and applicable to that content or service. If any provision of
your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your the Terms is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that
username and password against misuse. portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner
Choice of Law consistent with applicable law to reflect, as nearly as
possible, the original intentions of the parties, and the
Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided
remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full force and
otherwise herein, the Terms shall be governed by the laws of
effect. Samsung's failure to enforce any right or provision of
the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law
the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision, or
provisions.
any other provision of the Terms.
You and Samsung agree to submit to the non-exclusive
Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to
jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York
fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is
to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms.
due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control
Notwithstanding this, you agree that Samsung shall still be
of Samsung. If there is any conflict between these Social Hub
allowed to apply for injunctive remedies (or equivalent type
Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy, the
of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
provisions of these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall

prevail. The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our
their nature should survive termination of your use of the collection, use, disclosure, management and storage of your
Service shall remain valid after any such termination. personal information as described below. We may, from time
Social Hub Privacy Policy to time, transfer or merge any personal information collected
off-line to our online databases or store off-line information
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") is committed to
in an electronic format. We may also combine personal
protecting the online privacy of visitors, users and customers
information we collect online with information available from
to our Social Hub service. This privacy policy ( "Privacy
other sources, including information received from our
Policy") forms part of the Terms which govern your use of
affiliates, marketing companies, or advertisers. This Privacy
Social Hub(excluding any third party content and services),
Policy covers all such personal information and will remain in
and (if applicable) the website where you accessed this
full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service,
Privacy Policy, (collectively, the "Service"). The purpose of
even if your use of or participation in any particular service,
the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of
feature, function or promotional activity terminates, expires,
information we gather about you when you access or use the
ceases, is suspended or deactivated for any reason.
Service, how we may use that information, and if and how
we disclose it to third parties. INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT
All users of the Service are required to provide true, current, Personal Information
complete and accurate personal information when prompted We may request that you supply us with "personal"
and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in information, such as your name, e-mail address, mailing
good faith to be incorrect, false, falsified, or fraudulent, or address, home or work telephone number in the course of
inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy. you accessing or using the Service, such as via registration
We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent forms, surveys, and polls. In each such case, you will know
in relation to your use of the Service. Separate from such what categories of information we collect because you will
consent, your access or use of the Service will be construed actively provide the information to us. You may not be able to
245
fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if use aggregated non-personal information about our users to
you choose not to provide certain information. If you do understand the demographics of users of the Service, such
choose to give us personal information through the Service, as the percentage of male and female users, the geographic
we will collect and retain that information. distribution of our users, the age ranges of our users, a
Non-Personal Information combination of these and/or other demographics. We may
also use the personal or non-personal information we collect
When you use the Service, we may also collect
to analyze how Service is being used, and to improve the
"non-personal" information. We consider "non-personal
content of the Service, and for marketing and promotional
information" to be information that, by itself, cannot be used
efforts.
to identify or contact you personally, such as demographic
information (your age, gender, income, education, E-mail Communications
profession, zip code, etc.). Non-personal information may If you send us an e-mail with questions or comments, we
also include technical information, such as your IP address may use your personal information to respond to your
and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service. questions or comments, and we may save your questions or
Non-personal information may also include information that comments for future reference. Aside from our reply to such
you provide us through your use of the Service, such as the an e-mail, it is not our standard practice to send you e-mail
terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub, mail unless you request a particular service that involves e-mail
inbox and instant messenger. We reserve the right to use or communications. However, you consent to us contacting you
disclose non-personal information in any way we see fit. by e-mail, and sending you information about products and
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT services which we believe may be of interest to you. You may
have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter
Our Services in which case information about the Service or our
We use your personal information to provide you with any advertisers will be sent to your e-mail address. We will
services that you may request or require, to communicate provide you with the option to change your preferences and
with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys. We opt-out of receiving those communications. You may request
at any time that we not e-mail you in future by clicking the We require these companies to use your personal
"unsubscribe" link which is included at the bottom of any information only to provide the particular product or service
e-mail that you receive from us. If you unsubscribe, we will and do not authorize them to use your personal information
make reasonable efforts to discontinue e-mail for any other reason. We sometimes offer promotions in
communications to you as soon as practicable. conjunction with a third party sponsor.
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO If you choose to participate in those promotions, we may
THIRD PARTIES share your information with the sponsor if they need it to
send you a product or other special promotion they offer.
Aggregate Information
Third Party Advertisers
Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy, we do
not share your personal information with any third party We may use third-party advertising companies to deliver
without your permission. We may disclose aggregate specific advertisements to you. These companies may collect
information, such as demographic information, and our non-personal information about your visits to Social Hub in
statistical analyses to third parties, including advertisers or order to provide advertisements about products and services
other business partners. This aggregate information does not that may be of interest to you.
include your personal information. These companies may also aggregate your non-personal
Service Providers information for use in targeted advertising, marketing
research, and other similar purposes. These companies may
We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in
place their own cookies on your computer. If you want to
providing you certain services. For example, we may use prevent a third-party advertiser from collecting and using this
third parties to provide advertising, marketing and
information, you may visit each third party advertiser's
promotional assistance, provide e-mail services, or facilitate
website directly and opt-out.
our online services. In those instances, we may need to
share your personal information with them.
247
Other Disclosures always some risk in transmitting information electronically.
We may disclose personal information when we are required The personal information we collect is stored within
or requested to do so by law, court order or other databases that we control.
government or law enforcement authority or regulatory As we deem appropriate, we use security measures
agency; to enforce or apply our rights and agreements; or consistent with industry standards, such as firewalls and
when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information encryption technology, to protect your information. However,
is necessary or advisable, including, for example, to protect we cannot guarantee the security of our databases, nor can
the rights, property, or safety of the Service and Samsung, we guarantee that information you supply won't be
our users, or others. intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet.
CHILDREN CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC
The Service is not designed for use by children without their AREAS
parent's supervision. We ask that anyone under the age of Our third party service and content providers may offer chat,
sixteen (16) not submit any personal information through the user reviews, bulletin boards, or other public functions and
Service. We do not knowingly collect any personal any posting by you is considered public information available
information from children under the age of eighteen, and to other users. Any posting is governed in accordance with
therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to the third party service and content providers' terms and
third parties. conditions. You should take care not to use personal
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE information in your screen name or other information that
COLLECT might be publicly available to other users.
The security of your personal information is important to us. Archived Information

We maintain physical, electronic, and procedural safeguards We maintain archives of web logs, database, and other
to secure your personal information. However, there is systems and information in relation to the Service. Please
note that it is possible some of this information may remain
archived after we delete the information from its active ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION WE
database. We maintain archives for disaster recovery, legal COLLECT
and other non-marketing purposes.
Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy,
How can I update my profile? the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your
You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by personal information, or any requests that we correct,
notifying us when you change zip/postal code, country of update, or remove your information in our databases, should
residence, age range, or e-mail address. If at any time you be directed via e-mail to s.dufresne@Samsung.com, or via
wish to update your information or stop receiving regular mail to:
communication from us, sign in to the Service and then Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
select 'update your profile' to change your preferences. 1301 E. Lookout Drive, Richardson, TX 75082
CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES Attn: Customer Support Department
Registration may be required to enter promotions such as After receiving a request to change your information, we will
contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub. These registration make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal
or entry processes may require your submission of personal information stored in databases we actively use to operate
information such as your first and last name, street address, the Service will be updated, corrected, changed or deleted,
city, state and zip code, e-mail address, telephone number as appropriate, as soon as reasonably practicable. However,
and date of birth. The entry page and/or rules for the we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any
promotion will provide the specific requirements for the information we remove from or change in our active
promotion. You may also have the opportunity to opt-in to databases. We may retain such information to resolve
special offers from our advertisers in connection with these disputes, troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms.
promotions.
249
In addition, it is not technologically possible to remove each 2. LICENSE
and every record of the information you have provided to us. 2.1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a
A copy of your personal information may exist in a limited, personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to
non-erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to use the Software in object code executable only form on a
locate. single device for non-commercial uses.
CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY 2.2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License
This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29, 2010 and are reserved to Licensor, and you agree not to take or permit
complies with Samsung's Corporate Privacy Policy. We any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly
reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time, authorised under this License. For the avoidance of doubt,
and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the you have no right to use, incorporate into other products,
Social Hub website. Please refer back to the Social Hub copy, modify, translate or transfer to any third party the
website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date Software or any modification, adaptation or copy of the
Privacy Policy. Software or any part thereof, nor to decompile, reverse
Social Hub End User License engineer, or disassemble the binary code of the Software,
Agreement either in whole or in part, except as expressly provided in this
License.
1. SOCIAL HUB 2.3 The Software is licensed to you only. You may not rent,
This end user license ("License") allows you to use Social lease, sub-license, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise
Hub ("Software") made available on your mobile device. This dispose of the Software, on a temporary or permanent basis
License is a legally binding agreement between you and without the prior written consent of Licensor.
Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. the ("Licensor").

3. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY 4.2.2 already in your possession, provided that Licensee can
RIGHTS show such possession from written records (other than as a
3.1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this result of a breach of this clause 4); or
License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property 4.2.3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain
rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the (other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4).
Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of 4.3 To the extent that any information is necessarily
Licensor or its licensors. disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or
3.2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright court order, such disclosure shall not be a breach of this
notices or similar proprietary devices, including without clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such
limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers, that disclosure.
may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the 5. WARRANTY AND SUPPORT
Software. The Software is provided "as is" with no representation,
4. CONFIDENTIALITY guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or
4.1 The structure, organisation and source code of the that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights
Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary (including intellectual property rights). Licensor has no
confidential information of Licensor and its licensors. You obligation under this License to provide technical or other
agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential support to you.
information in the Software or derived from it to any third 6. LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY
party. 6.1 Licensor does not exclude its liability (if any) to you:
4.2 The provisions of clause 4.1 will not apply to any 6.1.1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor's
information which is: negligence;
4.2.1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality 6.1.2 for fraud; or
(otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor); or
251
6.1.3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability. DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS) HOWSOEVER
6.2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH:
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY 6.3.1 THE SOFTWARE, OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR
EXCLUDES (TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW), SUPPLY, OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY, OF THE
ALL CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES (INCLUDING WITHOUT SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR'S
LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUB-CONTRACTORS;
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL 6.3.2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE) AND STIPULATIONS, OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE;
EXPRESS (OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE) 6.3.3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE; OR
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY, CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE
6.3.4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE, OR ADVICE
WHICH, BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION, WOULD OR MIGHT
GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN, BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR.
SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU. EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS
LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY 6.4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO
YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
6.3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6.1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST
LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER (WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF STATUTORY PROFITS, EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION WILL
DUTY, RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INJURY,
APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
DEATH, DAMAGE OR DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
LOSS (ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE, WITHOUT FRAUD, MISREPRESENTATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT,
NEGILIGENCE, PERSONAL INJURY, PRODUCTS LIABILITY,
LIMITATION, PURE ECONOMIC LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, OR ANY OTHER
THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS

BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 7.3 Upon termination of this License for any reason
THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK, AND HEREBY whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable
WAIVE, ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, TREBLE, your access to the Software.
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITATION 7.4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is
AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING without prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either
AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG party accrued prior to termination. Clauses 2.2, 2.3, 3, 4, 5,
WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH 6, 7.3, 8, 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be
CLAIM. enforceable notwithstanding termination.
6.5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause 8. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such
8.1 The formation, existence, construction, performance,
risk and/or insure accordingly.
validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any
6.6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State
by this clause 6. of New York.
7. TERM AND TERMINATION 8.2 The courts in New York City will have non-exclusive
7.1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in
acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software connection with this License. The parties irrevocably agree to
and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause submit to that jurisdiction.
7.2 or otherwise in accordance with this License. 9. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW
7.2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact
comply with any term or condition of this License or if you that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of
cease to use the Software for any reason. Korea, you may be subject to additional laws in other
jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software. You
253
will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the 10.5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this
Software, including without limitation any applicable export License by updating the License on its web site, or by
laws or regulations. notifying you by post or by e-mail. You are advised to check
10.GENERAL the Licensor's website periodically for notices concerning
revisions. Your continued use of the Software shall be
10.1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any
deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms.
court, tribunal, administrative body or authority of competent
jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that 10.6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this
provision will, to the extent required, be severed from this License by using the Software on any device.
License and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible,
modifying any other clause or part of this License and this
will not affect any other provisions of this License which will
remain in full force and effect.
10.2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right,
power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any
partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or
of some other right, power or remedy.
10.3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its
terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it.
10.4 This License contains all the terms which the parties
have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License
and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements,
representations or understandings between the parties in
relation to such subject matter.
Index
A B Care and Maintenance 220
Accounts Back button 23 Children and Cell Phones 212
setting up 54 Battery Contacts
Adobe PDF 167 charging 7 creating 54
Alarm indicator 7 display options 57
Turning Off 147 installing and removing 7 exporting and importing 60
AllShare Battery Use & Safety 216 groups 60
configuring 148 Bluetooth joining 59
Android keyboard pairing with a device 140 linking 59
configuring 43 settings 178 namecards 59
App Shortcuts 33 turning on or off 140 separating joined 59
Application Bar 20, 24 Browser setting a photo as contact
Applications 36 Quick Controls 89 icon 130
downloading new 166 Browser Settings 86 starred contacts 62
Applications settings C updating 56
allow mock locations 204 Calendar 150 D
development 204 Camcorder Display / Touch-Screen 218
managing 188 recording video 122 Display settings
running services 188 settings 123 font style 185
stay awake 204 Camera DivX®
USB debugging 204 settings 119 registration code 206
taking photos 118
255
Do cell phones pose a health Google Home screen 19
hazard? 208 Gmail 64 adding widgets 29
Downloads Latitude 90 customizing 21
managing 142 Local 91 folders 33
E Maps 92 primary shortcuts 29
Email Navigation 96 wallpaper 34
Combined view 70 Play Store 166 I
composing and sending 71 your account 10 Internet 81
configuring accounts 68 YouTube 100, 175 K
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Google Messenger 80
Kies 143
Signals 208 Google Play 166
via Wi-Fi 179
F Google Search 99, 170
Google Voice Typing 53
L
FCC Notice and Cautions 225 Language and keyboard settings
Google+ 81
Firmware Update 143 select locale 196
GPS 219
G GPS Applications 145 Latitude Settings 94
Gallery 127 Local 91
Groups
sharing photos and video 131 Location Services Settings 191
creating 60
viewing photos and video 128 Locking and Unlocking
Gmail
H unlocking the keyboard 14
Handwriting 51
account settings 67
composing and sending 66
refreshing your account 65 Home button 23
setting up your account 64
256
M O Q
Maps 92, 158 Operating Environment 223 Quick Controls 89
Menu Other Important Safety R
context-sensitive 24 Information 225 Reducing Exposure
Messages P Hands-Free Kits and Other
Gmail 64 Pairing with Bluetooth 140 Accessories 211
types 64 Photo ID Reset
Messenger 80 setting 130 factory data 201
Mini App Tray 20, 35 Photos Responsible Listening 221
Music Gallery 127 Restricting Children's Access to Your
add songs to a playlist 108 sharing 131 Mobile device 225
creating a playlist 107, 110 taking 118 S
Music Player 110 Play Music app 102 Samsung Account
N Play Store 166 signing in 190
Namecards Playlists Samsung keyboard
sending 59 adding songs 108 entering text 43
Navigation 23 creating 107, 110 Samsung Kies 143
command keys 29 Polaris® Office 167 Samsung Mobile Products and
Primary Shortcuts 29 Powering On and Off 9 Recycling 218
screen 24 Predictive Text 197 SAR Values 214
Navigation button 23 Privacy settings
Notification Panel 25 factory data reset 201
Notifications 25
257
Screen settings Sound settings U
auto adjust screen power 186 notifications 182 UL Certified Travel Charger 218
auto-rotate screen 184 ringer volume 181 Update Available 145
brightness 184 Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) USB connections
timeout 185 Certification Information 213 as a mass storage device 144
Search Standard Limited Warranty 227 USB settings
Google 99, 170 Status Bar 27 as a mass storage device 144
Securing your device Swype mass storage device 144
locking and unlocking 14 configuring 49 Windows Media Player 144
Security entering text 48 V
locking and unlocking 14 Synchronization settings
Videos
locking your device 14 auto-sync 190 Gallery 127
Security settings T recording 122
device administration 195 Text sharing 131
passwords 195 changing input method 43 Volume
trusted credentials 195 entering 42 key 18
Settings 176 input methods 42
Location Services 191 using Swype 48
Shortcuts 33 virtual QWERTY keyboard 42
Smart Practices While Driving 215 Turning Your Device On and Off 9
Snooze 147
Social Hub 237
Software Update 206
258
W WiFi (see Wi-Fi) 137 X
Warranty Information 227 Wi-Fi Direct 28, 138 XT9 Predictive Text 197
Widgets 29 Windows Media Player Y
synchronizing with 144
Wi-Fi YouTube 100, 175
adding a connection Wireless Networking
manually 138 Bluetooth 139
Direct 60 Wi-Fi 137
Direct settings 181 World Clock 173
enabling 90
scanning and connecting 138
settings 176
turning on or off 137, 176
259

Galaxy Tab 8.5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Galaxy Tab 8.5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Galaxy Tab 8.5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A N D R O I D T A B L E T

Please read this manual before operating your

Address: 85 Challenger Road

Toll Free 1-800-SAMSUNG

Section 1: Getting Started ...........................6 Status Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

1. Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (1)..

3. Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power

Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen

Turning Your Device Off

From any screen, touch and hold Home and then

Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual

The last screen you accessed displays.

Understanding Your Device 16

3. 3.5mm Headset Jack: Plug in for headphones.

Understanding Your Device 18

Understanding Your Device 20

Understanding Your Device 22

Understanding Your Device 24

Understanding Your Device 26

Understanding Your Device 28

Understanding Your Device 30

Understanding Your Device 32

Understanding Your Device 36

Understanding Your Device 38

Understanding Your Device 40

Note: Swype has to be enabled before it is available in the

• Touch 2. Touch the edit key.

Note: To properly recognize the written characters and to Handwriting

Contacts and Accounts 56

Contacts and Accounts 58

Contacts and Accounts 60

Adding Favorites Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.

Contacts and Accounts 62

Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to

Internet and Social Networking 82

Internet and Social Networking 84

Internet and Social Networking 86

Internet and Social Networking 88

Internet and Social Networking 92

Internet and Social Networking 96

Internet and Social Networking 98

Internet and Social Networking 100

Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch Creating a Playlist

To play, rename, or delete a playlist:

From the Home screen, touch Camera.

Photos and Video 118

Photos and Video 120

Record Important! Do not take videos of people without their

Photos and Video 122

Photos and Video 124

Photos and Video 126

Photos and Video 128

Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a

Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/DCIM/Camera folder as

Photos and Video 130

Photos and Video 132

Photos and Video 134

Photos and Video 136

Kies Via Wi-Fi 3. From a Home screen, touch Apps

Applications and Widgets 146